VITEK 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
(REV 08/2004)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
bioMérieux, Inc.
Box 15969
Durham, North Carolina 27704-0969 / USA
Tel. (1) 800-682-2666
bioMérieux sa
EC R EP au capital de 11 879 045 €
673 620 399 RCS LYON
69280 Marcy l’Etoile / France
tél. 33 (0)4 78 87 20 00 / fax 33 (0)4 78 87 20 90
http://www.biomerieux.com
Printed in USA
Argentina Colombia Italy
bioMérieux Argentina s.a. bioMérieux Colombia Ltda bioMérieux Italia S.p.A.
Av. Congreso 1745 Diagonal 109 # 20A - 33 Via Fiume Bianco, 56
(C1428BUE) Capital Federal Bogotá 00144 Roma
Buenos Aires tel. (57) 1 619 64 70 tel. (39) 06 52308.1
tel. (54) 11 5555-6800 fax (57) 1 619 69 10 fax (39) 06 52308.240
fax (54) 11 5555-6888
Denmark Ivory Coast
Australia bioMérieux Danmark Aps bioMérieux Afrique Occidentale
bioMérieux Australia P/L Smedeholm 13C 08 BP 2634
Unit 25, Parkview Business Center 2730 Herlev Rue Joseph Blohom - Cocody
1 Maitland Place tel. (45) 70 10 84 00 Abidjan 08
Baulkham Hills NSW 2153 fax (45) 70 10 84 01 tel. (225) 22 40 93 93
tel. (61) 2 8852 4700 fax (225) 22 40 93 94
fax (61) 2 8852 4777 Finland
bioMérieux Suomi Oy Japan
Austria Rajatorpantie 41 C bioMérieux Japon, Ltd.
bioMérieux Austria GmbH 01640 Vantaa Seizan Bldg.,
Eduard-Kittenberger-Gasse 97 tel. (358) 9 8545 6000 12-28 Kita-Aoyama 2-chome
Top 3 fax (358) 9 8545 6045 Minato-ku, Tokyo 107-0061
A-1230 Wien tel. (81) 3 5411 86 91
tel. (43) 186 50 650 France fax (81) 3 5411 86 90
fax (43) 186 50 661 bioMérieux SA
69280 Marcy l’Etoile Korea
Belgium tel. (33) 0(4) 78 87 20 00 bioMérieux Korea Co., Ltd.
bioMérieux Benelux s.a./n.v. fax (33) 0(4) 78 87 20 90 7th floor YooSung Building
Media Square http://www.biomerieux.com # 830-67, Yoksam-dong,
18–19 Place des Carabiniers Kangnam ku
Bruxelles 1030 Germany Séoul
tel. (32) 2 743 01 70 bioMérieux Deutschland GmbH tel. (82) 2.547.6262
fax (32) 2 733 55 97 Weberstrasse 8 fax (82) 2.547.6263
D 72622 Nürtingen
Brazil tel. (49) 7022 30070 Mexico
bioMérieux Brasil SA fax (49) 7022 36110 bioMérieux México SA de CV
Estrada Do Mapuá Chihuahua 88, col. Progreso
491 Jacarepaguá Greece México 01080, D.F.
CEP 22710 261 Rio de Janeiro RJ bioMérieux Hellas S.A. tel. (52) 55 5481 9550
tel. (55) 21 2444 1400 Papanikoli 70 fax (52) 55 5616 2245
fax (55) 21 2455 6099 15232 Halandri
Athens Netherlands
Canada tel. (30) 210 81 72 400 bioMérieux Benelux BV
bioMérieux Canada, Inc. fax (30) 210 68 00 880 Boseind 15
4535, Dobrin P.O. Box 23
Saint Laurent (Québec) H4R 2L8 India 5280 AA Boxtel
tel. (1) 514 336 7321 bioMérieux India Pvt. Ltd tel. (31) 411 65 48 88
fax (1) 514 336 6450 D-45, Defense Colony fax (31) 411 65 48 73
New Delhi 110 024
Chile tel. (91) 11 2 464 88 40 New Zealand
bioMérieux Chile S.A. fax (91) 11 2 464 88 30 bioMérieux New Zealand Ltd.
Seminario 131 22/10 Airbourne Road
Providencia Indonesia North Harbour Auckland
Santiago bioMérieux Asean tel. (64) 9 415 0601
tel. (56) 2634 20 92 Enseval Building fax (64) 9 415 0603
fax (56) 2634 20 93 Kawasan Industri Pulo Gadung - Jl. Pulo
Lentut No. 10 Norway
China Djakarta Timur 13920 bioMérieux Norge AS
bioMérieux China Limited tel. (62) 21 461 51 11 Økernveien 145
Unit 1701-2, 17/F, Nanyang Plaza fax (62) 21 460 41 07 N-0513, Oslo
No. 57 Hung To Road, Kwun Tong tel. (47) 23 37 55 50
Kowloon - Hong Kong fax (47) 23 37 55 51
tel. (852) 2356.7033
fax (852) 2330.2085

510779-1EN1
Phillipines Sweden Turkey
Representation Office bioMérieux Sverige AB bioMérieux Diagnostik A.S.
bioMérieux Phillipines Hantverksvägen 15 Yenisahra Mah.
11th floor, Pearlbank Centre 436 33 Askim Caliskan Sok. No. 4
146 Valero Street, Salcedo Village tel. (46) 31 68 84 90 34746 Kadiköy / Istanbul
1227 Makati City fax (46) 31 68 48 48 tel. (90) 216 472 81 30
tel. (632) 817 7741 fax (90) 216 472 81 35
fax (632) 812 0896 Switzerland
bioMérieux Suisse s.a. United Kingdom
Poland 51, avenue Blanc bioMérieux UK Ltd
bioMérieux Polska Sp. Z. o.o. Case postale 2150 Grafton Way, Basingstoke
ul. Zeromskiego 17 1211 Genève 2 Hampshire RG22 6HY
01-882 Warszawa tel. (41) 22.906 57 60 tel. (44) 1256.461881
tel. (48) 22 569 85 00 fax (41) 22.906 57 42 fax (44) 1256.816863
fax (48) 22 569 85 54
Taiwan USA
Portugal Representation Office bioMérieux, Inc.
bioMérieux Portugal, Lda. bioMérieux China Limited — 100 Rodolphe Street
Rua Alto do Montijo, Lotes 1 e 2 Taiwan Branch Durham NC 27712
Portela de Carnaxide RM 608, No. 6-3 Ching Cheng Street tel. (1) 919 620 20 00
2794-070 Carnaxide Taipei 105 fax (1) 919 620 22 11
tel. (351) 21 424 59 80 tel. (886) 2 2545 2250
fax (351) 21 418 32 67 fax (886) 2 2545 0959 Vietnam
Representation Office
Russia Thailand bioMérieux Vietnam Rep. Office
o.o.o. bioMérieux bioMérieux Thailand Ltd Sai Gon Center Bldg. 11th Fl.
Petrovsko-Razoumovskii proyezd, 29 Regent House Bldg, 16th Floor 65 Le Loi District 1
127287 Moscow 183 Rajdamri Road, Lumpini, Ho Chi Minh City
tel. (7) 095 212 10 26 Pathumwan tel. (632) 817 7741
(7) 095 424 79 38 Bangkok 10330 fax (632) 812 0896
fax (7) 095 214 95 41 tel. (66) 2 651 98 00
fax (66) 2 651 98 01
Spain
bioMérieux España s.a.
Manual Tovar, 36
28034 Madrid
tel. (34) 91.358 11 42
fax (34) 91.358 06 29
Distribution in over 130 countries

510779-1EN1
Liability Disclaimer
bioMérieux, Inc. makes no express or implied warranty regarding this manual, its
quality, performance, or appropriate use regarding any type of specific procedure.
Furthermore, this manual may be modified by bioMérieux without notice and

without implying any obligation or liability on the part of the company.
Intellectual Property
bioMérieux and VITEK are registered trademarks of bioMérieux, Inc.
Loctite is a registered trademark of the Henkel Corporation.
Vibratite is a registered trademark of ND Industries.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
Lucent is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies Inc.
© 2004 bioMérieux, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a

retrieval system, or translated into any language (human or computer) in any form, or
by any means whatsoever, without the prior express written permission of
bioMérieux, Inc.
Patent Information
The VITEK 2 Compact instrument is covered by one or more of the following U.S.
Patent Numbers:
• Carousel for Incubation Station — 6,136,270
• Incubation Station — 6,156,565
• Reader Head Assembly — 5,888,455
• Transport System from Incubation Station to Optical Reader — 5,853,666;
5,670,375; 5,798,085
• Cutting and Sealing Station — 5,891,396
• Instrument — 6,086,824
• Foreign Counterparts
Other Patents Pending.
The VITEK 2 Compact instrument may also be covered by one or more of the
following U.S. Patent Numbers:
D414,272; D437,797; 5,609,828; 5,746,980; 5,804,437; 5,869,005; 5,932,177;

5,951,952; 6,267,929; 6,309,890; 6,340,573; and Foreign Counterparts.

510779-1EN1
Warranty
bioMérieux, Inc., (“Seller”) warrants the VITEK 2 Compact instrument (the

“Instrument”) to the original purchaser for a period of one (1) year after date of
installation against defects in material and workmanship and defects arising from
failure to conform to specifications applicable on the date of installation. Seller
further agrees to correct, either by repair, or, at its election, by replacement, any such
defect found on examination to have occurred, under normal use and service, during
such one-year period, provided Seller is promptly notified in writing upon discovery
of such defect.
Seller shall not be liable under this Warranty for any defect arising from abuse of the
system, failure to operate and maintain the system in accordance with the
documentation included with the Instrument, including repair service, alteration or
modification of the system by any person other than service personnel of bioMérieux,
Inc., or use of modified, changed, or previously used disposables.
The warranty of Seller set forth above and the obligations and liabilities of Seller
thereunder are exclusive and in lieu of all other remedies or warranties, express
or implied, arising by law or otherwise, with respect to the system delivered
hereunder (including without limitation any obligation of Seller with respect to
merchantability, fitness for particular purpose and non-infringement). In no
event shall Seller be liable for incidental or consequential damages, however
arising and whether or not occasioned by Seller’s negligence.
This Warranty shall not be extended or altered except by written instrument signed by
Seller.
All of the product elements in the Seller’s Instrument and the total Instrument are
warranted to be new or equivalent to new for the full product warranty period of one
year. Disposables and replacement items with a normal life expectancy of less than
one year, such as batteries and bulbs, are excluded from this warranty.

510779-1EN1
510779-1EN1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .......................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Purpose of the This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Organization of the Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4 Chapter Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.5 Finding Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.6 Typographic and Usage Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.6.1 Name and Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.6.2 Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.6.3 Procedural Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.6.4 References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.6.5 Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.6.6 User Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.7 Warnings, Cautions, and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.8 Standard Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
2 SYSTEM SETUP ............................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Preparations for Unpacking the VITEK 2 Compact System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Unpacking Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3.1 Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3.2 Required Instrumentation and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3.3 System Placement and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.4 Host Computer and Instrument Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4 Power Up VITEK 2 Compact System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.4.1 Power On Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.4.2 Power On Host Computer and Set Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2.4.3 Power On Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.5 Verify Proper Instrument Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.5.1 Diagnostics Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.5.2 Login and Status Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.5.3 General Instrument Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.5.4 Simulated Processing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2.6 Software Login and Alarm Message Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
3 SYSTEM OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.1 User Interface System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.2 Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.3 Filler Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.2.4 Load/Unload Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual i

510779-1EN1
Table of Contents
3.2.5 Transport System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

3.2.6 Bar Code Reader Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.2.7 Card Sealer Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.2.8 Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.2.9 Incubator Heater Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.2.10 Reader System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.2.11 Waste Collection Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS .................................................................................................................. 4-1

4.1 Reference Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2 VITEK 2 Compact Interface System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1 Instrument User Interface System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2 Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.2.3 VITEK 2 Compact Status Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.2.4 Filler Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.2.5 Loader Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.2.6 General Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.2.7 Information and Warning Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.4 Host/Workstation Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.5 Vacuum/Filler Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.6 Card Transport System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.6.1 Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.6.2 Cassette Load/Unload Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.7 Bar Code Reader Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.7.1 Card Sealer Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.7.2 Autoloader Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.8 Reader/Incubator Processing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.8.1 Carousel Card Ejector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.8.2 Carousel Incubator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.8.3 Reader System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.9 System Electronics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.9.1 BCB Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.9.2 Head Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.9.3 Sample Prep Node Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.9.4 DC Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.9.5 User Interface Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4.9.6 Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
5 COMPONENT REPLACEMENT .......................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.1.1 Repair Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.1.2 Referenced Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2 Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.2.1 Top Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
ii VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
Table of Contents
5.2.2 Left Side Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

5.2.3 Right Side Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.2.4 Front Panel Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.2.5 Rear Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.3 Power Switch Entry Module (PEM) Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.3.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.3.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4 Power Entry Module (PEM) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.5 Power Supply Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.5.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.5.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.6 Solid-State Relay (SSR) Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.6.1 Vacuum Pump SSR Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.6.2 Vacuum Pump SSR Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.6.3 Incubator SSR Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5.6.4 Incubator SSR Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.7 Electronic Circuit Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.7.1 Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.7.2 DC Power Distribution Supply Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.7.3 Head Control Assembly Board (HCB) Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.8 Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.8.1 SPN Board Jumper Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.8.2 SPN Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.8.3 Transport Encoder Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5.9 Display Assembly Component Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.9.1 User IF Assembly Board Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.9.2 User IF Assembly Board Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.9.3 Blue and White LCD Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.10 Instrument Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.10.1 Transport Linear Actuator Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.10.2 Incubator Motor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.10.3 Reader Head Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.10.4 Autoloader Linear Actuator Motor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.10.5 Ejector Motor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.10.6 Cam Motor Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.10.7 Sealer Linear Actuator Motor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.11 Instrument Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.11.1 Optical Switch Assembly Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.11.2 Convergent Reflective Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.12 Transport Assembly Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.12.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.12.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.13 Incubator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual iii

510779-1EN1
Table of Contents
5.13.1 Heater Incubator Fan Replacement (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

5.13.2 Incubator Fan Replacement (Bottom). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.13.3 Incubator Heater Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.14 Transmittance Optics Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5.14.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5.14.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.15 Reader Head Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
5.15.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.15.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.16 Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.16.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
5.16.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.17 Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5.17.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5.17.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.18 Vacuum Pump Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.18.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.18.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.19 Three-Way Filler Valve Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.19.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.19.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
5.20 Rear Panel Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5.20.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5.20.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5.21 Bar Code Scanner Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5.21.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5.21.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5.22 Sealer Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5.22.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5.22.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.23 Sealer Hot Wire Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.23.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.23.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
6 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Instrument Diagnostics Using DML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.1.1 Accessing DML Using HyperTerminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6.1.2 Accessing DML Using Physical Connection from Instrument to Alternate PC. . 6-7
6.1.3 Accessing DML using Remote-Anything . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.1.4 Opening Instrument Diagnostic Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.1.5 Disable Modem of Host Computer and Log Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.1.6 Disconnect Microsoft Windows Dial-Up Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.1.7 Searching for DML Commands and Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.1.8 System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.1.9 Cabinet Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
iv VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
Table of Contents
6.1.10 Vacuum/Filler Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

6.1.11 Transport Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.1.12 Bar Code Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.1.13 Sealer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.1.14 Autoloader Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.1.15 Incubator/Carousel Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.1.16 Reader/Transmittance/CAM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6.1.17 UPS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6.1.18 Host Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6.1.19 Flash Log Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
6.1.20 Diagnostic Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6.1.21 Motor Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6.1.22 Firmware Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
6.1.23 Macro Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
6.1.24 BURN-IN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
6.2 General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6.3 Windows XP Event Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
6.3.1 VITEK 2 Compact System Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
A SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
B DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURE ...................................................................................................B-1

B.1 Decontaminating the VITEK 2 Compact Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.2 Decontaminating Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
C INSTALLATION CHECKLIST ..............................................................................................................C-1
D INSTRUMENT ERROR CODE USER RESPONSE TABLE .................................................................... D-1
GLOSSARY ..............................................................................................................................GLOSSARY-1
INDEX ............................................................................................................................................INDEX-1
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual v

510779-1EN1
Table of Contents
vi VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 2-1: Proper Handhold Locations .....................................................................................................2-3

Figure 2-2: Power Entry Module ...................................................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-3: VITEK 2 Compact System Power Connection Diagram #1
(with Optional UPS and Power Conditioner)......................................................................2-7
(with Optional Power Conditioner)........................................................................................2-8
Figure 2-5: VITEK 2 Compact System Cabling Diagram #1 (one instrument) ..............................2-9
Figure 2-6: VITEK 2 Compact System Cabling Diagram #2 (two instruments).......................... 2-10
Figure 2-7: Hardware Key............................................................................................................................ 2-12
Figure 2-8: Language Options ................................................................................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-9: Language Selection................................................................................................................. 2-15
Figure 2-10: Settings Tab ............................................................................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-11: Advanced Tab............................................................................................................................ 2-16
Figure 2-12: Install V2C ................................................................................................................................... 2-17
Figure 2-13: Initialization Screen ................................................................................................................. 2-18
Figure 2-14: Second Initialization Screen.................................................................................................. 2-19
Figure 2-15: Status Screen in Idle Condition............................................................................................ 2-20
Figure 2-16: Com3 Properties Window ...................................................................................................... 2-21
Figure 2-17: Terminal Settings...................................................................................................................... 2-22
Figure 2-18: Diagnostics Properties ............................................................................................................ 2-22
Figure 2-19: Vacuum Tube Connections ................................................................................................... 2-24
Figure 2-20: VITEK 2 Compact Engineering Test Cards Arrangement............................................. 2-28
Figure 3-1: VITEK 2 Compact Instrument ...................................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-2: User Interface Keypad and Screen........................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3: Loaded Cassette ..........................................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4: VITEK 2 Compact Station Block Diagram ............................................................................3-4
Figure 3-5: Filler Station Access Door Opened.........................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-6: Vacuum Pump with Side Panel Removed ...........................................................................3-6
Figure 3-7: Load/Unload Station Door Opened ......................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-8: Transport Assembly ....................................................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-9: Bar Code Reader Assembly .....................................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-10: Bar Code Scanner .......................................................................................................................3-9
Figure 3-11: Sealer Assembly...........................................................................................................................3-9
Figure 3-12: Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station ...................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-13: Heater Assembly....................................................................................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-14: Reader System Optics ............................................................................................................. 3-11
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual vii

510779-1EN1
List of Figures
Figure 3-15: Transmittance Optics Cross Section ................................................................................... 3-12

Figure 3-16: Waste Collection Station Door Open ................................................................................. 3-13
Figure 4-1: Keypad and Screen .................................................................................................................... 4-4
Figure 4-2: VITEK 2 Compact Main Menu ................................................................................................. 4-5
Figure 4-3: Main Menu Diagram.................................................................................................................. 4-6
Figure 4-4: Instrument Status Field.............................................................................................................. 4-7
Figure 4-5: Status Screen Showing Filler Ready...................................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4-6: Filling-in-Progress Indicator ..................................................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4-7: Message Queue Indicator (Warning Mode).................................................................... 4-13
Figure 4-8: UPS and Host PC Communication Port Locations ......................................................... 4-14
Figure 4-9: Host Computer and Printer ................................................................................................... 4-15
Figure 4-10: Vacuum Chamber Door Opened ........................................................................................ 4-16
Figure 4-11: Vacuum Chamber .................................................................................................................... 4-16
Figure 4-12: Vacuum Station Vacuum Pump (Side View) ................................................................... 4-17
Figure 4-13: Filler Station Pneumatic Diagram....................................................................................... 4-18
Figure 4-14: Theoretical Vacuum Cycle Chart (Reference Only) ....................................................... 4-20
Figure 4-15: Cassette Loaded with Cards ................................................................................................. 4-21
Figure 4-16: Transport Assembly with Instrument Front Removed................................................... 4-22
Figure 4-17: Bar Code Reader ...................................................................................................................... 4-23
Figure 4-18: Card Sealer Station.................................................................................................................. 4-24
Figure 4-19: Incubator Autoloader Station ............................................................................................... 4-24
Figure 4-20: Carousel Card Ejector ............................................................................................................. 4-25
Figure 4-21: Carousel System and Components .................................................................................... 4-26
Figure 4-22: Incubator Heater ...................................................................................................................... 4-27
Figure 4-23: Optics System and Components ......................................................................................... 4-28
Figure 4-24: Reader System Components ................................................................................................ 4-29
Figure 4-25: Optical System — Cross Section........................................................................................... 4-30
Figure 4-26: Waste Collection Station ........................................................................................................ 4-31
Figure 4-27: Top Level Board Diagram ..................................................................................................... 4-32
Figure 4-28: BCB Location (Board Mount Assembly Opened)........................................................... 4-33
Figure 4-29: HCB Location ............................................................................................................................. 4-34
Figure 4-30: SPN Boards ................................................................................................................................ 4-35
Figure 4-31: DC Power Distribution Board ............................................................................................... 4-36
Figure 4-32: U/I board installed in instrument. ...................................................................................... 4-36
Figure 4-33: Power Supply Assembly ......................................................................................................... 4-37
Figure 5-1: Covers and Panels ...................................................................................................................... 5-6
Figure 5-2: Rear Panel Assembly Screws................................................................................................... 5-9
Figure 5-3: Main AC Power Entry Module Fuse Replacement ......................................................... 5-10
viii VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
List of Figures
Figure 5-4: Power Entry Module ................................................................................................................ 5-11

Figure 5-5: Rear Power Supply Cover ...................................................................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-6: Power Supply Components ................................................................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-7: Power Supply Voltage Adjustment .................................................................................... 5-13
Figure 5-8: Vacuum Pump SSR .................................................................................................................. 5-17
Figure 5-9: Incubator Solid-State Relay Replacement........................................................................ 5-18
Figure 5-10: BCB Circuit Board Replacement (Top Panel Removed) .............................................. 5-19
Figure 5-11: Board Locations ........................................................................................................................ 5-21
Figure 5-12: SPN Board Replacement........................................................................................................ 5-23
Figure 5-13: Transport Assembly Encoder Board ................................................................................... 5-24
Figure 5-14: Display Assembly Component Replacement................................................................... 5-25
Figure 5-15: Sample Drive Motor................................................................................................................. 5-27
Figure 5-16: Transport Assembly (Shown with Rear Panel Removed)) .......................................... 5-27
Figure 5-17: Incubator Motor ........................................................................................................................ 5-29
Figure 5-18: Reader Head Motor ................................................................................................................. 5-30
Figure 5-19: Autoloader Motor ..................................................................................................................... 5-31
Figure 5-20: Card Ejector Motor ................................................................................................................... 5-32
Figure 5-21: Cam Motor (Top View) ........................................................................................................... 5-34
Figure 5-22: Sealer Linear Actuator Motor ............................................................................................... 5-35
Figure 5-23: Optical Switch Assembly Sensor.......................................................................................... 5-37
Figure 5-24: Convergence Reflective Sensor............................................................................................ 5-38
Figure 5-25: Convergent Reflective Sensors............................................................................................. 5-39
Figure 5-26: Transport Replacement (Front)............................................................................................ 5-40
Figure 5-27: Transport Replacement (shown from rear of instrument) .......................................... 5-41
Figure 5-28: Incubator Assembly with Back Cover Removed ............................................................. 5-42
Figure 5-29: Optics Modules.......................................................................................................................... 5-44
Figure 5-30: Optics Modules (Top View) ................................................................................................... 5-45
Figure 5-31: Reader Head Assembly .......................................................................................................... 5-46
Figure 5-32: Reader Head Drive Belt (Partially Disassembled)......................................................... 5-47
Figure 5-33: Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt...................................................................................... 5-48
Figure 5-34: Reader Head Roller Plate ...................................................................................................... 5-49
Figure 5-35: Vacuum Pump (Shown with Cabinet Removed)............................................................ 5-51
Figure 5-36: Instrument Cabinet Fans........................................................................................................ 5-53
Figure 5-37: Bar Code Scanner .................................................................................................................... 5-54
Figure 5-38: Sealer Assembly........................................................................................................................ 5-55
Figure 5-39: Sealer Hot Wire......................................................................................................................... 5-56
Figure 6-1: Network Connections .................................................................................................................6-9
Figure 6-2: Modem Enable .............................................................................................................................6-9
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual ix

510779-1EN1
List of Figures
Figure 6-3: Words Example One................................................................................................................ 6-12

Figure 6-4: Words Example Two................................................................................................................ 6-13
Figure 6-5: Words Example Three............................................................................................................. 6-13
Figure 6-6: Words Example Four .............................................................................................................. 6-13
Figure 6-7: VER Example Output ............................................................................................................... 6-14
Figure 6-8: HEALTH Example Output ....................................................................................................... 6-17
Figure 6-9: DUMP_COMPSTAT Example Output .................................................................................. 6-18
Figure 6-10: Listing of DUMP_STAT Component Names ..................................................................... 6-19
Figure 6-11: DUMP_STAT Example Output (Using Carousel)............................................................. 6-19
Figure 6-12: NODE_STATUS Example Output.......................................................................................... 6-20
Figure 6-13: WELLMAPS Output Example ................................................................................................. 6-23
Figure 6-14: SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO Output Example
(fans running greater than or equal to 40%)................................................................. 6-24
(fans running less than or equal to 40%)........................................................................ 6-24
Figure 6-16: Filler Status Output Example ................................................................................................ 6-25
Figure 6-17: DUMP_FILLER Output Example............................................................................................ 6-26
Figure 6-18: DUMP_CO 0 Output Example .............................................................................................. 6-30
Figure 6-19: TEST_SEALER Output Example............................................................................................. 6-32
Figure 6-20: INCUBATOR_STATUS............................................................................................................... 6-33
Figure 6-21: SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO Output Example ..................................................................... 6-34
Figure 6-22: DUMP_CM 0............................................................................................................................... 6-34
Figure 6-23: CARO_STATUS........................................................................................................................... 6-36
Figure 6-24: CAL_TX 1 Output Example..................................................................................................... 6-41
Figure 6-25: SCAN_TX_SENSORS 0 Output Example ............................................................................ 6-42
Figure 6-26: SCAN_TX_SENSORS 1 Output Example ............................................................................ 6-42
Figure 6-27: READ_TX 1 Output Example ................................................................................................. 6-42
Figure 6-28: UPS_STATUS Output Example.............................................................................................. 6-43
Figure 6-29: COM_STATUS Output Example............................................................................................ 6-44
Figure 6-30: CTDB_STATUS Output Example........................................................................................... 6-45
Figure 6-31: TAIL_LOG 5 Output Example ................................................................................................ 6-47
Figure 6-32: GREP_LOG fill............................................................................................................................. 6-47
Figure 6-33: SHOW_ALIGNMENTS Output Example .............................................................................. 6-55
Figure 6-34: Computer Management Screen .......................................................................................... 6-63
x VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1: Reference Documents ..................................................................................................................2-4

Table 2-2: Required Instrumentation and Equipment List ....................................................................2-4
Table 2-3: VITEK 2 Compact Cable Connections .....................................................................................2-5
Table 2-4: Power Entry Module Settings .....................................................................................................2-6
Table 2-5: Pre-Defined User Accounts ...................................................................................................... 2-13
Table 4-2: Interface Keypad ...........................................................................................................................4-4
Table 4-3: Fill Indicator Status .................................................................................................................... 4-18
Table 4-4: Load Indicator Status ................................................................................................................ 4-22
Table 5-2: +12/-12 VDC Power Supply Information ........................................................................... 5-13
Table 5-3: +5 VDC Power Supply Information ....................................................................................... 5-14
Table 5-4: 12 VDC Power Supply Information ....................................................................................... 5-14
Table 5-5: 24VDC Power Supply Information ........................................................................................ 5-15
Table 5-6: 120 VDC Power Supply Information .................................................................................... 5-16
Table 5-7: Optical Switch Sensors ............................................................................................................. 5-36
Table 5-8: Convergent Reflective Sensors ............................................................................................... 5-39
Table 6-1: DML Groups ................................................................................................................................. 6-12
Table 6-2: Critical Data Description .......................................................................................................... 6-45
Table 6-3: VITEK 2 Compact Motor Names ............................................................................................ 6-49
Table 6-4: Components Available for Burn-In ....................................................................................... 6-56
Table 6-5: Reference/Troubleshooting Drawings ................................................................................. 6-59
Table 6-6: General Instrument Troubleshooting Information ........................................................... 6-59
Table 6-7: File Descriptions .......................................................................................................................... 6-65
Table 6-8: File Descriptions .......................................................................................................................... 6-66
Table C-1: Installation Checklist ....................................................................................................................C-1
Table D-1: VITEK 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table .................................... D-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual xi

510779-1EN1
List of Tables
xii VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
CHAPTER 1: HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
About This Chapter
This chapter contains information about how this manual is organized and how to
use this manual. We recommend that you read this chapter first.
IMPORTANT: Read this manual carefully before you attempt to work on or use the VITEK® 2
Compact instrument.
Note: The VITEK 2 Compact instrument conforms to the relevant European regulations for
electrical safety and EMC.
Chapter Contents
1.1 Purpose of the This Manual • 1-2

1.2 Intended Audience • 1-2
1.3 Organization of the Manual • 1-2
1.4 Chapter Organization • 1-3
1.5 Finding Topics • 1-3
1.6 Typographic and Usage Conventions • 1-4
1.6.1 Name and Titles • 1-4
1.6.2 Press • 1-4
1.6.3 Procedural Steps • 1-4
1.6.4 References • 1-4
1.6.5 Select • 1-4
1.6.6 User Input • 1-4
1.7 Warnings, Cautions, and Information • 1-5
1.8 Standard Symbols • 1-5
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual 1-1

510779-1EN1
Purpose of the This Manual How to Use this Manual
1.1 Purpose of the This Manual
This Service Manual contains information on the operation, installation, maintenance,

and repair of the VITEK 2 Compact integrated system. This information is intended to
provide an understanding of how the system performs, possible causes of
malfunctions, and how to isolate and correct performance problems.
IMPORTANT: Figures, schematics and their components are not necessarily shown to scale in
this manual. Figures and schematics are included in this manual for illustrative
purposes or as examples.
1.2 Intended Audience
This manual is for use by bioMérieux Field Service Engineers and factory-trained
Biomedical Engineers to assist in the troubleshooting and repair of the VITEK 2
Compact integrated system. Every effort has been made to ensure that the
information contained in this manual is complete and accurate. All calibration and
adjustment procedures used in this manual are adapted directly from current
engineering documentation.
1.3 Organization of the Manual
The information in this manual is organized into six chapters, arranged so that the
information you need first is in the beginning of the manual. Information required for
maintenance after the system is operating is found in later chapters.
The following is a brief outline of this manual:

• Chapter 1: How to Use This Manual — Explains how the manual is organized
and how to use the manual.
• Chapter 2: System Setup — A complete guide for the installation and setup of
the VITEK 2 Compact integrated system. This chapter begins with unpacking the
instrument and proceeds through its power-up and configuration.
• Chapter 3: System Overview — Introduces the VITEK 2 Compact integrated
system hardware.
• Chapter 4: System Components — Describes the components of the system and
their operation. This chapter contains the descriptions of the boards and the
major subassemblies.
• Chapter 5: Component Replacement — Describes how to remove, install, and
mechanically align the subassemblies that may be encountered during repair of
the VITEK 2 Compact integrated system. This chapter is intended for use after you
have completed troubleshooting and problem diagnosis.
• Chapter 6: Troubleshooting — Includes accessing and applying DML commands
used in troubleshooting and diagnosing instrument failures, along with displaying
system statuses. This chapter also contains a General Instrument Troubleshooting
Table for the VITEK 2 Compact integrated system error detecting and reporting
system. This table lists possible malfunctions and recommended corrective
actions.
1-2 VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
How to Use this Manual Chapter Organization
Following these chapters are appendices listing specifications, procedures for

decontamination/cleaning, an installation checklist, and an instrument error code
user response table. There is a glossary of terms in the back of the manual.
After completing this service manual, you should be able to:

• Identify the VITEK 2 Compact integrated system instruments and independent
subsystems.
• Determine the instrument workflow and explain each subsystem operation.
• Troubleshoot errors in the VITEK 2 Compact integrated system module.
• Determine and perform alignment/calibration procedures for the VITEK 2
Compact integrated system.
1.4 Chapter Organization
All of the chapters are organized in the same way and include the following:
• About This Chapter — Summary of the chapter’s content and purpose
• Chapter Contents — A table of contents for the chapter
• Descriptions and/or Procedures — Descriptions and procedures appropriate for
this chapter’s subject matter.
• Background Information, where applicable and useful
1.5 Finding Topics
This manual uses several methods to help you find information and keep your
bearings:
Table of Contents — Located at the front of the manual. It contains the titles of all
chapters/appendices and their sections, and the page number of each title and
section.
List of Figures — Located at the front of the manual. It contains a list of all figures in
the manual and the page number of each figure.
List of Tables — Located at the front of the manual. It contains a list of all tables in
the manual and the page number of each table.
Chapter Contents — Located at the front of each chapter. It lists all sections in the
chapter and their page number.
Page Headers — Located at the top of each page. There are two parts to a header:
the chapter title and the primary section title.
Page Footers — Located at the bottom of each page. There are three parts to a
footer: the manual name, the manual part number, and the page number.
Index — Located at the back of the manual. It contains topical entries and their page
numbers.

510779-1EN1
Typographic and Usage Conventions How to Use this Manual
1.6 Typographic and Usage Conventions
1.6.1 Name and Titles

The names and titles of menus, fields, and icons are in Proper Case, bold.
Example: Select Configuration.
The names of windows and screens are in Proper Case, but are not bolded.
Example: From the Configuration Menu screen.
1.6.2 Press
The word “press” refers to pressing a key on the user interface in order to initiate
action in the firmware.
Example: Press the Message (!) key.
We also use the word “press” to refer to pressing switches and buttons on the
instrument or other hardware components.
1.6.3 Procedural Steps

Steps in procedures are sequentially numbered. A bullet list in a step indicates
options.
1.6.4 References
References to chapter and section titles in this manual are in Proper Case.
Example: See Chapter 5, Component Replacement.
References to other manuals are in Proper Case and italic.

Example: See the VITEK 2 Compact Instrument User Manual.
1.6.5 Select
The word “select” is generally used for selecting menu commands and for user
interface navigation.
Example: Select Configuration > Date Format.
1.6.6 User Input

Instructions for user input begin with the word “type” or “enter.” This manual uses
bold for literal user input and italic for placeholders.
Example of Literal User Input: In the box, type April 1.
In the previous example, type exactly what you see on the page (April 1 in this case).

510779-1EN1
How to Use this Manual Warnings, Cautions, and Information
Example of a Placeholder: Enter your password before you...
In this example, you are to type your assigned password.
1.7 Warnings, Cautions, and Information
This manual uses different types of symbols to alert you to important information.
Symbols and their associated information are labeled in text where they occur and
set off from surrounding paragraphs, as shown in the following examples.
WARNING
Warning is a statement that alerts the user to the possibility of injury,
death, or other serious adverse reactions associated with the use or
misuse of a device.
CAUTION: Caution is a statement that alerts the user to the possibility of

a problem with the device associated with its use or misuse. Such
problems include device malfunction, device failure, damage to the
device, or damage to other property. Where applicable, a caution
statement may include a precaution that should be taken to avoid the
hazard.
IMPORTANT: Important relates to content presented in this manual. It is used to reinforce the
importance of your understanding or remembering something.
Note: Note supplies additional information about a topic.
1.8 Standard Symbols
Other symbols that may appear in the instructions for use or on the instrument,
package inserts, or packaging include:
CE-marking of conformity
Consult Instructions for Use
Use By

510779-1EN1
Standard Symbols How to Use this Manual
Manufacturer
Date of Manufacture
Contains sufficient for <n> tests
Keep Dry
Fragile, Handle with Care
Caution, consult accompanying documents
Biological Risks
Electric Shock Warning
Radiation Warning
Potential Pinch Point Warning
Laser

510779-1EN1
How to Use this Manual Standard Symbols
Temperature Limitation
Upper Limit of Temperature
Lower Limit of Temperature
IVD In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Device
LOT Batch Code
EC R EP Authorized Representative in the European

Community
REF Catalog Number
SN Serial Number
Do Not Reuse
2
Fuse
Recyclable
Direct Current
Alternating Current

510779-1EN1
Standard Symbols How to Use this Manual
Both Direct and Alternating Current
Three-phase Alternating Current
Earth (ground) Terminal
Protective Conductor Terminal
Frame or Chassis Terminal
Equipotentiality
ON (Supply)
OFF (Supply)
ON (only for a component of the system

equipment)
OFF (only for a component of the system

equipment)
Equipment protected throughout by double

insulation or reinforced insulation (equivalent to
Class II of IEC 536)

510779-1EN1
CHAPTER 2: SYSTEM SETUP
About This Chapter
This chapter contains instructions for unpacking, installing, and setting up the VITEK 2
Compact system.
Chapter Contents
2.1 Preparations for Unpacking the VITEK 2 Compact System • 2-2

2.2 Unpacking Procedure • 2-2
2.3 Installation Procedure • 2-3
2.3.1 Reference Documents • 2-4
2.3.2 Required Instrumentation and Equipment • 2-4
2.3.3 System Placement and Connections • 2-5
2.3.4 Host Computer and Instrument Configuration • 2-6
2.3.4.1 BCB Hardware Key Installation (optional) • 2-11
2.4 Power Up VITEK 2 Compact System • 2-12
2.4.1 Power On Peripherals • 2-12
2.4.2 Power On Host Computer and Set Language • 2-12
2.4.2.1 English Setup • 2-12
2.4.2.2 Non-English Setup • 2-13
2.4.3 Power On Instrument • 2-18
2.5 Verify Proper Instrument Operation • 2-20
2.5.1 Diagnostics Connection • 2-20
2.5.2 Login and Status Check • 2-23
2.5.3 General Instrument Information • 2-25
2.5.4 Simulated Processing Cycle • 2-27
2.5.4.1 Instrument Setup • 2-27
2.5.4.2 Cassette Setup • 2-28
2.5.4.3 Fill Cycle Test • 2-28
2.5.4.4 Cassette Scan Test • 2-29
2.5.4.5 Sealing and Cassette Removal Test • 2-29
2.5.4.6 Card Reading and Unload into Waste Container Test • 2-30
2.6 Software Login and Alarm Message Review • 2-31

510779-1EN1
Preparations for Unpacking the VITEK 2 Compact System System Setup
2.1 Preparations for Unpacking the VITEK 2 Compact System
1. Inspect the shipping container for external damage.

2. If the shipping container is damaged, verify that the VITEK 2 Compact system is
not damaged.
3. If the instrument is damaged, file a claim with the shipper and notify
bioMérieux®, Inc.
4. Check the packing list and verify that all required items are included in the
shipment.
5. Verify that there is suitable bench space for the VITEK 2 Compact instrument,
that the bench is capable of supporting the VITEK 2 Compact instrument, and
that the bench is level to within 3 degrees.
Note: Retain the packaging materials and shipping container for future transportation
needs (if necessary).
CAUTION: The VITEK 2 Compact instrument weighs approximately 75 kg

(165 lb). At least two people are required to lift or move the instrument.
When lifting the instrument, use only the handhold pockets on all four
sides of the gray Base Pan (see Figure 2-1 for handhold locations).
Otherwise, severe instrument damage can occur.
WARNING
The fastening straps may have sharp edges. Use caution when
handling the straps.
2.2 Unpacking Procedure
The following steps make up the recommended procedure to remove the VITEK 2
Compact instrument from its shipping container.
1. Cut the fastening straps that are wrapped around the shipping container.
2. Carefully remove and discard the straps.
3. Carefully remove the shipping container top from the bottom mounting skid
and set it aside. Use extreme caution to avoid damaging the instrument or the
container top.
4. Remove the accessory kit, foam packing blocks, and shipping bag.
5. With at least one person at each end, carefully lift the instrument using the
handhold pockets located on the front, back, and sides of the Base Pan
(Figure 2-1).

510779-1EN1
System Setup Installation Procedure
Proper Handhold Locations
Figure 2-1: Proper Handhold Locations
6. Move away from the bottom skid and end cap, and place the instrument in the
desired location.
7. Unpack the host PC, monitor, printer, and any optional peripherals.
2.3 Installation Procedure
After completing the unpacking procedure, place the VITEK 2 Compact system in its
permanent location.
The VITEK 2 Compact system is intended for use on any normal, flat benchtop
commonly found in a microbiology lab. The benchtop must be capable of supporting
the weight and size of the instrument.
Perform the following steps to prepare the VITEK 2 Compact instrument for use.
CAUTION: The power source to the VITEK 2 Compact instrument must be

properly grounded.

510779-1EN1
Installation Procedure System Setup
2.3.1 Reference Documents
Note: Always refer to the latest drawing revision.
Table 2-1: Reference Documents
Document
Document
Number
510772 VITEK 2 Compact Instrument User Manual
510773 VITEK 2 Compact Online Software User Manual
531602 VITEK 2 Compact System Electronics Jumper and Test Point Specifications
531900 Schematic/Wiring Diagram VITEK 2 Compact
532600 VITEK 2 Compact Alignment Procedure
532610 VITEK 2 Compact Firmware Error Codes
532611 VITEK 2 Compact Instrument Manufacturing Commands
532612 VITEK 2 Compact Field Service Commands
QP-09004 Handling Procedure — Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Devices
VKCXXX Firmware, VKC
2.3.2 Required Instrumentation and Equipment

Table 2-2: Required Instrumentation and Equipment List
Item Quantity Ref. No.
Calibrated NIST Traceable Dial Thermometer 1 399144-1
Calibrated smart Manometer ± 0.02 PSIA accuracy with 1 399129-1

Vacuum Chamber Y-Insert Tubing 530678-1
Calibrated Digital Multimeter 1 N/A
19.05 cm (7.5 in.) minimum square, lint-free dark cloth 1 N/A

510779-1EN1
2.3.3 System Placement and Connections
WARNING
The VITEK 2 Compact instrument contains electrical components and
devices. Use extreme caution when performing service or
maintenance tasks as there is a danger of electric shock.
1. Place the VITEK 2 Compact instrument in its permanent location.

Position the instrument to meet the minimum clearance of 11 cm (4.3 in.) on
both sides and 21 cm (8.3 in.) above the instrument to provide necessary
access for cleaning and maintenance.
2. Place the host PC, monitor, printer, and any optional peripherals in their
permanent location.
3. Properly connect all power connection and system cables, including the Host
Computer, Monitor, etc. (Refer to Figure 2-3 through Figure 2-6.) See Table 2-3
for cable connection locations.
4. Clean the instrument Vacuum Chamber Door seal with a water-dampened
cloth or paper towel.
5. Clean the glass surfaces of the Transmittance Optics with a lint-free lens paper
or an alcohol wipe with the excess alcohol squeezed out, followed by lint-free
lens paper.
6. Open the instrument Front and Top Access Doors.
7. Install the Carousel Cover.
8. Install a calibrated NIST Traceable Dial Thermometer (P/N 399144-1) into the
Incubator Cover, ensuring it is snapped all the way in place.
Note: Industrial instruments are shipped with a dial thermometer. The thermometer is an
option for clinical instruments. (If a Dial Thermometer is not provided with the
instrument, use the one referenced in Table 2-2, Required Instrumentation and
Equipment List).
9. Turn the thermometer power ON.

10. Close all doors.
11. Place the bar code labels on the cassette(s).
Table 2-3: VITEK 2 Compact Cable Connections
Connections Connection Location
Power Cable Right Side Panel (standard universal IEC power connector)
UPS Interface Left Side Panel (9 pin, RS 232)
Computer Interface Left Side Panel (25 pin, RS 232)

510779-1EN1
Installation Procedure System Setup
2.3.4 Host Computer and Instrument Configuration

By default, the VITEK 2 Compact instrument is configured to process 30 cards in the
carousel at one time. As an option, the instrument may be upgraded to process 60
cards. If an instrument upgrade is required at time of installation, perform the BCB
Hardware Key Installation procedure found on page 2-11.
1. Configure the Host Computer switch setting to the appropriate power

configuration (110 V or 220 V).
2. Configure the VITEK 2 Compact instrument’s Power Entry Module (PEM),
located on the right side of the instrument to the appropriate power
configuration (100 V, 120 V, 220 V, or 240 V) per Table 2-4.
Table 2-4: Power Entry Module Settings
Local Power Parts Required Voltage Selector
100 VAC, 50/60 Hz Fuse Drawer (190178-26) 100 V

5 A Fuse (192810-5)
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz Fuse Drawer (190178-26) 120 V

5 A Fuse (192810-5)
220 VAC, 50/60 Hz Dual Fuse Drawer (P/N 190178-50) 220 V

two 4 A fuses (P/N 192821-4)
230–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz Dual Fuse Drawer (P/N 190178-50) 240 V

two 4 A fuses (P/N P/N 192821-4)
Voltage
Selector
Fuse Drawer
Power Entry
Module
Figure 2-2: Power Entry Module

510779-1EN1
Host PC - (Back View)
Mode m
IOIO B
System Setup
510779-1EN1
Mouse
Monitor
Keyboard
IOIO A
ISDN
Telecommunications
(Alternate)

Laser printer Power Conditioner
Monitor
1200VA
ABC1000-11 (110V)
ABC1250-22 (220V)
(optional)
Power Conditioner
1200VA UPS 1500VA
ABC1000-11 (110V) UPS 1500VA SUA1500 (110V)
ABC1250-22 (220V) SUA1500 (110V) SUA1500i (220V)
(optional) SUA1500i (220V) (optional)
(optional)
(with Optional UPS and Power Conditioner)

VITEK 2 Compact VITEK 2 Compact
Instrument #1 Instrument #2
2-7
Installation Procedure
2-8
Mode m
IOIO B
Mouse
IOIO A Monitor
Keyboard
Laser printer
Monitor ISDN
Telecommunications
(Alternate)
Power Conditioner
Power Conditioner 1200VA
1200VA ABC1000-11 (110V)
ABC1000-11 (110V) ABC1250-22 (220V)
ABC1250-22 (220V) (optional)
(optional)
(with Optional Power Conditioner)

VITEK 2 Compact VITEK 2 Compact
Instrument #1 Instrument #2

510779-1EN1
System Setup
System Setup
510779-1EN1
Mode m
IOIO B
Mouse
Monitor
Keyboard
IOIO A
DATA DIAG.

Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
Alternate Modem
Telecommunications
Mouse
Remote
Communications
BCI #2 Serial Cable
(optional) DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
Monitor DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
Printer Cable
p/n 186152-10
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
BCI #1
Laser printer (optional)
Bar Code
Scanner UPS/Instr. Cable
(optional) Keyboard p/n 186133-10
UPS 1500VA VITEK 2 Compact Instrument
SUA1500 (110V)
SUA1500i (220V)
(optional)
Figure 2-5: VITEK 2 Compact System Cabling Diagram #1 (one instrument)
2-9
2-10
Mode m
IOIO B
Mouse
Monitor
Keyboard
IOIO A
Serial Cable
DATA DIAG.
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
V2c-PC Y Cable
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
p/n 186129-10
A B C D
BCI #2 Alternate Modem

(optional)
Mouse
Remote Telecommunications
Serial Cable Communications
Monitor DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
Printer Cable
p/n 186152-10
Laser printer
UPS/Instr. Cable UPS/Instr. Cable
BCI #1 p/n 186133-10
(optional) p/n 186133-10
UPS 1500VA UPS 1500VA

Bar Code SUA1500 (110V) SUA1500 (110V)
Scanner SUA1500i (220V) SUA1500i (220V)
(optional) VITEK 2 Compact Instrument (optional) VITEK 2 Compact Instrument (optional)
Keyboard
Figure 2-6: VITEK 2 Compact System Cabling Diagram #2 (two instruments)

510779-1EN1
System Setup
In Figures 2-5 and 2-6 additional parts are required to complete the configuration. In
the configuration shown in Figure 2-5 the additional part needed is a dual port serial
card (p/n 186168-100) into which the cables are connected as shown. The
configuration shown in Figure 2-6 the additional part needed is a card with an
oversized serial port and includes a special four port connector cable, (p/n 186168-
101) to which the cables are connected as shown.
2.3.4.1 BCB Hardware Key Installation (optional)
By default, the VITEK 2 Compact instrument is factory-configured to process 30 cards

in the carousel at one time. As an option, the instrument can be upgraded to process
60 cards by installing a BCB Hardware Key onto the Bay Controller Board.
WARNING
The VITEK 2 Compact instrument contains electrostatic discharge
sensitive devices and should, therefore, be handled in accordance with
the requirements of QP-09004 (Electrostatic Discharge Handling).
Note: Ensure that the Carousel is empty prior to the installation of the BCB Hardware Key.
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.

2. Loosen the eight hex head screws securing the Top Panel Assembly.
3. Remove the Top Panel Assembly by slightly lifting up the back end, moving the
Top Panel toward the back of the instrument, and then lifting it up.
4. Set the Top Panel Assembly aside.
5. Loosen and remove the two pan-head screws securing the lid of the Board
Mount Assembly.
6. Pivot the lid forward and allow it to rest on the Front Panel Assembly.
7. Insert the Hardware Key into the P15 connector, such that the board sits over
the P14 connector (Figure 2-7).

510779-1EN1
Power Up VITEK 2 Compact System System Setup
Hardware Key
Location
Figure 2-7: Hardware Key
8. Close the lid of the Board Mount Assembly and reinstall the two pan-head
screws.
9. Reinstall the Top Panel Assembly by first placing the front end underneath the
Front Panel Assembly. Carefully lower the back end.
10. Secure the eight hex-head screws.
2.4 Power Up VITEK 2 Compact System
2.4.1 Power On Peripherals

1. Turn the UPS and Power Conditioner switches ON, if applicable. (Both of these
are supplied only as options with the VITEK 2 Compact system.)
2. Turn the Monitor and Printer power switches ON.
2.4.2 Power On Host Computer and Set Language
2.4.2.1 English Setup
1. Turn the Host Computer power switch ON.

2. Once the Host Computer completes booting, log in to the Admin account.

510779-1EN1
System Setup Power Up VITEK 2 Compact System
Note: The following is the factory default password for Admin. (This may be changed by
the user at a future time.)
User Name: Admin

Password: bmx_admin
3. From the Windows taskbar, select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Date
and Time.
4. Set the date, time, and time zone.
5. Simultaneously press CTRL + ALT + DEL to reboot the host PC.
6. Leave a CD-R/W disc in the drive for nightly backup use.
7. Proceed to Section 2.4.3, Power On Instrument.
2.4.2.2 Non-English Setup
To change the default regional and language settings, perform this section in its
entirety.
1. Turn the Host Computer power switch ON.
2. If applicable, configure the Bar Code Scanner to match the keyboard by
scanning the appropriate programming bar codes. (Refer to the Bar Code
Scanner User Guide.)
Table 2-5: Pre-Defined User Accounts

Pre-Defined
User ID Default Password Usage
User Account
Administrator Admin bmx_admin Lab Administrator or
bioMerieux Personnel
Administrator bmx_admin “password of the day” bioMerieux Personnel
Lab Administrator LabAdmin labadmin Lab Administrator
Lab Supervisor LabSuper labsuper Lab Supervisor
Lab Technologist LabTech labtech Lab Technologist
Note: The following is the factory default password for Admin. (This may be changed by
the user at a future time.)
User Name: Admin

Password: bmx_admin
4. From the Windows taskbar, select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Date
and Time.
5. Set the date, time, and time zone.
6. Log in to the desired account.
7. From the Windows® taskbar select Start > Settings > Control Panel >
Regional and Language Options.

510779-1EN1
Note: Not all accounts will have the Advanced tab available.
8. On the Regional Options tab, set the Standards and Formats to the desired
language. You may also want to set the Location. When finished, click Apply.
Do not restart at this time.
Figure 2-8: Language Options
9. On the Languages tab, set the Language used in menus and dialogs to the
desired language. When finished, click Apply. Do not restart at this time.

510779-1EN1
Figure 2-9: Language Selection
10. Click Details to go to the Text Services and Input Languages dialog.
11. On the Settings tab, set the Default input language to the desired language. If
the desired language does not appear in the drop-down list, click Add and
select the desired language. When finished, click OK.
Figure 2-10: Settings Tab

510779-1EN1
12. On the Advanced tab, if available under the current account, set the Language
for non-Unicode programs to the desired language. If you have Administrator
privileges, you can check the box to “Apply all settings to the current user
account and to the default user profile” in order for these language settings to
apply to any new user accounts. When done, click OK.
Figure 2-11: Advanced Tab
13. From the Windows taskbar, click Start > Settings > Printers and Faxes. The
Printers and Faxes window appears.
14. Highlight the applicable printer (i.e. OKI B4350). From the Printer Tasks, click
Select Printing Preferences. Refer to the printer’s user manual for instructions
on how to set the correct paper size. Close the Printer window when complete.
15. Repeat this procedure, (steps 6 to 14) to change the default regional and
language and printer settings for any additional accounts.
16. Reboot the host PC for these settings to take effect.
18. Insert the VITEK 2 Compact Software CD into the DVD drive.
19. Navigate to the proper directory as shown in Figure 2-12 and run the
install-v2c file.

510779-1EN1
Figure 2-12: Install V2C
20. Set the proper software language by following the displayed prompts. When
prompted, ensure that Reboot is enabled, then click OK. Once complete,
remove the CD from the DVD drive.
CAUTION: Changing the VITEK 2 Compact software erases all patient

data; therefore, the language should be set at the time of installation.
21. Start the VITEK 2 Compact software application, but do not log in. Once the
Login screen displays, click Cancel to quit the application. Click Yes to confirm.
22. Insert the VITEK 2 Compact Online Software Manual CD into the DVD drive.
Using Windows Explorer, navigate to the InstData\NoVM directory and run the
v2c-docs file. Set the proper software language by following the displayed
prompts. Once complete, remove the CD from the DVD drive.
23. Insert the VITEK 2 Compact Base OS DVD into the DVD drive.
24. Restart the host PC from the Windows taskbar by selecting Start > Log Off >
Restart. The computer boots from the Full System Restore DVD.
25. Follow the onscreen prompts to perform a Full Disk Backup.
26. When prompted, insert a blank DVD-R disc to hold the full backup.
27. When the process finishes (it takes several minutes), remove the newly created
Full System Backup DVD and label it.
28. Simultaneously press CTRL + ALT + DEL to reboot the host PC.
29. Provide the DVD to the customer as their Restore DVD (the factory DVD is in
English only).

510779-1EN1
30. Leave a CD-R/W disc in the drive for nightly backup use.
2.4.3 Power On Instrument

1. Turn the VITEK 2 Compact power switch to the ON position. The instrument
power switch is located on the right side of the instrument.
2. After powering ON the instrument, review the instrument Status screen and
ensure that the carousel capacity indicates 60 slots available. (With no Key
installed, 30 slots are displayed by default.)
3. The first Power-Up screen displays the VITEK 2 Compact logo and the
bioMérieux logo (Figure 2-13).
Figure 2-13: Initialization Screen
4. The second Power-Up screen displays the instrument name, VITEK 2 Compact,
copyright date, BCB version, and an initializing progress bar (see Figure 2-14).

510779-1EN1
Figure 2-14: Second Initialization Screen
5. Once power-up is complete, the Status screen displays Filler: Not Ready, the
Quad Missing icon, and the word Error in the lower left corner with an
alternating exclamation point (!).
6. From the keypad panel, press the Status/Menu icon until the Main
Menu displays.
7. From the Main Menu select Maintenance > Replace Carousel.
8. Follow the directions on the Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen to install all
four carousel quadrousels. (Refer to the VITEK 2 Compact Instrument User
Manual [p/n 510772] for detailed information.)
9. From the keypad panel, press the Status/Menu icon until the Status
screen displays.
10. After a successful power-up, the User Interface screen should look similar to
Figure 2-15.
Note: If a BCB Hardware Key is installed, review the instrument Status screen and ensure
that the carousel capacity indicates 60 slots available. (With no key installed, 30 slots
are displayed by default.)

510779-1EN1
Verify Proper Instrument Operation System Setup
Figure 2-15: Status Screen in Idle Condition
Note: The instrument may still be warming.
2.5 Verify Proper Instrument Operation
2.5.1 Diagnostics Connection

1. At the Host Computer, double-click the corresponding Diagnostic
HyperTerminal icon from the desktop (Instrument 1 Diagnostic or Instrument
2 Diagnostic).
If a Diagnostic HyperTerminal icon is not defined for the VITEK 2 Compact
instrument, perform steps 2 through 19. Otherwise, proceed to the next
section.
2. Click Start, then select All Programs > Accessories > Communications >
HyperTerminal. A Connection Description window displays.
3. Type Instrument 1 Diagnostic or Instrument 2 Diagnostic, corresponding
with the VITEK 2 Compact instrument you are configuring.
4. Select an appropriate icon, and click OK. A Connect To window displays.
5. Click the drop-down arrow for the Connect using option.
• Select COM6 if configuring a diagnostics connection for VITEK 2 Compact #1
or
• Select COM8 if configuring a diagnostics connection for VITEK 2 Compact #2.
6. Click OK. A Properties window displays.
7. By using the drop-down menus, configure the port as shown in Figure 2-16.

510779-1EN1
System Setup Verify Proper Instrument Operation
Figure 2-16: Com3 Properties Window
8. Click OK.
9. From the Diagnostic – HyperTerminal window, select File > Properties. The
Properties window displays.
10. Click the Settings tab and use the Emulation drop-down to select VT100.
11. Click the Terminal Setup button. The Terminal Settings window displays.
12. Select 132 column mode, as shown in Figure 2-17.

510779-1EN1
Figure 2-17: Terminal Settings
13. Click OK.

14. Ensure the Diagnostics Properties settings are as shown in Figure 2-18.
Figure 2-18: Diagnostics Properties
15. Click OK. The Diagnostic – HyperTerminal window redisplays.

16. Select File > Save As.
17. From the Save in drop-down, select Desktop.

510779-1EN1
18. Click Save. The current settings are now saved to a desktop icon.
19. Repeat this procedure for other instruments, if required.
2.5.2 Login and Status Check

1. To display the Prompt > press Spacebar Backspace or Esc Esc.
2. At the Prompt > type LOGIN XXXXXX (where XXXXXX = login for the
corresponding login group).
Note: Refer to Drawing 532612 — VITEK 2 Compact Field Service Commands for
information. Logins are case-sensitive.
A line describing the login group confirms a successful login.
3. Press Enter.
4. Verify the system status from the Diagnostic window prompt by typing HEALTH
and pressing Enter. The instrument’s Health Information displays. Ensure there
are no instrument errors or warnings.
5. At the Prompt > type VER and press Enter. Confirm that the displayed
firmware Application Version (BCB), BOOT, and SPN for nodes 2, 3, 6, and 8
match the latest revision per Drawing VKCXXX.
Record the firmware versions for future reference. (The version information can
also be found at the instrument by selecting Diagnostics > Versions from the
Main Menu of the User Interface screen).
6. Type SET_SYS_NUM XXXXX (where XXXXX = the company-assigned site

number).
7. Press Enter.
8. For the purposes of this procedure, the incubator must remain ON for at least
one hour with all four Quadrousels installed, the Incubator Cover in place, and
the Thermometer installed.
9. Confirm the incubator is within specification (35.5 °C ±1°C) from the User
Interface Main Menu by selecting Diagnostics > Temperature. Record the
incubator temperature.
10. From the Keypad Panel, press the Status/Menu button until the Status
Screen displays.
11. From the user interface select Maintenance > Temperature Check and
perform a manual incubator temperature check. Refer to p/n 510772 VITEK 2
Compact Instrument User Manual for detailed information. Record the
temperature displayed on the disk thermometer
12. Confirm the Instrument Incubator Temperature on the User Interface reads
within ±1.0 °C of the temperature displayed on the Disk Thermometer.
13. At the Prompt > type ALIGN_ON and press Enter. This configures the
instrument for alignment, which includes unlocking the doors, including the
word ALIGN in the DML prompt, and indicating on the User Interface that it is in
Maintenance mode.

510779-1EN1
14. Ensure that the Filler Door is closed.

15. Type the command FILLER_LEAK_TEST and press Enter. The firmware starts
the Vacuum Pump, pulls down to the calibrated PSIA value, holds for 30
seconds, and returns to ambient pressure. Confirm that no errors occur.
a. A “Success: NO leak was detected during the fill cycle”
message should appear at the terminal.
b. If the message “Error: leak was detected during the fill
cycle” occurs, there was a loss greater than or equal to 0.06 PSIA
during the hold time.
16. Loosen the eight hex-head screws securing the Top Panel Assembly.
17. Remove the Top Panel Assembly by slightly lifting up the back end, moving the
Top Panel toward the back of the instrument, and lifting it up.
18. Set the Top Panel Assembly aside.
19. Disconnect the Vacuum Tubing Line from the small, barbed fitting at the back
of the Filler Chamber and connect it to the Y of the Vacuum Chamber Y Insert
(Figure 2-19).
See Step #21
See Step #19
See Step #20
Figure 2-19: Vacuum Tube Connections
20. Connect the shorter tubing length of the Vacuum Chamber Y Insert to the
fitting that was just occupied.
21. Connect the longer tubing length of the Vacuum Chamber Y Insert to your
Absolute Pressure Gauge.
22. Ensure that the Filler Chamber is empty and the door is closed.
23. Turn the Absolute Pressure Gauge ON.
24. Type the command CYCLE_VAC and press Enter. This runs a standard vacuum
cycle. Confirm the value displayed on the Pressure Gauge during the five-

510779-1EN1
second holding time is correct. If the value 0.89 PSIA ±0.04 PSIA is not met or if
an error occurs, perform the Vacuum Filler Calibration procedure found in the
VITEK 2 Compact Alignment Procedure (Drawing 532600).
25. Disconnect the Absolute Pressure Gauge tubing and reconnect the instrument
Vacuum Tubing.
26. Reinstall the Top Panel Assembly by first placing the front end underneath the
Front Panel Assembly. Carefully lower the back end. Secure the eight hex-head
screws.
27. At the Prompt > type ALIGN_OFF and press Enter. This disables Alignment
mode and the instrument reboots.
28. Wait for completion of the reboot before using the instrument.
2.5.3 General Instrument Information

• To display the DML Prompt >, press Spacebar Backspace or Esc Esc.
• A login is always required to gain entry into DML, as well as after a successful
login has timed out. There are different groups associated with login. For the
purposes of this procedure, use the Field Service group when logging in to DML.
This allows access to the commands approved for Field Service. To log in, at the
Prompt > type LOGIN XXXXXX (where XXXXXX = login for the corresponding login
group), then press Enter. A line describing the login group confirms a successful
login. Logins are case-sensitive. Refer to Drawing 532612 — VITEK 2 Compact
Field Service Commands for more information.
• Calibrated test equipment must be NIST or bioMérieux traceable and bear a valid
calibration sticker.
• Reviewing Warning and Error Messages
On the Graphical User Interface (GUI), a dancing exclamation point to the left
of the Overall Status (OK, Maintenance, Warming, Error, or Intervention)
signifies a warning or error message was generated. The detailed message
must be reviewed to clear the alarm.
To review all messages, press the ! key on the instrument user interface. A list
displays on the Error Message Queue screen. An asterisk (*) to the far left of
a message signifies that it was never reviewed. An exclamation (!) to the
immediate left of a message signifies that it is an error. Use the Up/Down
Arrow keys to move the pointer to the desired message. Then, press [!] to
display the detailed message. An error code displays on the lower right
corner of the screen. Refer to Drawing 532610 (VITEK 2 Compact Firmware
Error Codes) and the specific test procedure related to the failure to resolve
the error.
To review pending messages from DML, type HEALTH and press Enter.
To review the instrument’s historical messages from DML, type DUMP_EQM

and press Enter.

510779-1EN1
An Intervention screen displays only if there is an error or warning during

initialization or card cassette processing that needs the user’s immediate
attention. The Intervention screen contains intervention messages and any
other pertinent information, and always requires some type of response by
the user.
• Review Warning Indicators

There are several icons that may appear as warnings on the user interface screen.
Door Opened — Top User Access Door, Front User Access Door, and/or
Card Waste Access Door is open.
UPS Present, But Power Fail
UPS Present, But Low Battery
Waste Container Not Present
Host Communication Failure
• Other icon indicators include:

Cassette Number — The icon to the right of the Loader Status displays
after successful bar code reading, and the cassette number is known.
Virtual Cassette — After successful bar code reading of the cassette

and all of the cards, if the cassette is a Virtual Cassette, this icon
displays to the right of the Loader Status.
Waste Container — The Waste Container is present and the

approximate level of cards in the waste container displays. [Range of
Levels: 0 to 5]
Available Slots — Number of available slots in the carousel. [Range: 0

to 30 or 0 to 60, depending on instrument configuration.]
Cassette Presence — The cassette is present in the loader area.
Carousel Quad Missing — At least one Quadrousel is missing in the

Carousel.

510779-1EN1
2.5.4 Simulated Processing Cycle

This section verifies proper processing operation of the instrument. During the
simulated processing cycle, visually check the operation of the VITEK 2 Compact as
the cards are moved from one station to the next and note any misalignments. If
misalignments are observed, realign the section, as described in the VITEK 2 Compact
Alignment Procedure (Drawing 532600).
2.5.4.1 Instrument Setup
1. Temporarily disconnect the data end of the corresponding VT2c -PC Y cable
from the host PC.
2. Ensure the Filler Station is empty and the Filler Door is closed.
3. At the User Interface Keypad, press Status/Menu until the Main Menu
appears.
4. Select Maintenance > Unlock User Access Door > Yes. The User Access Door
unlocks.
5. Open both the Front and Top User Access Doors.
6. Apply electrical tape (or equivalent) to block the Top Access Door optical
sensors.
7. Quickly and without hesitation apply electrical tape (or equivalent) to block the
Optical Sensors of the Front Access Door Sensor. The instrument re-initializes.
Note: If an emergency stop (e-stop) occurs, remove the tape and recycle the power. Once
initialized, resume the procedure at step 2.
8. Cover the top of the Transmittance Optics with a dark, lint-free cloth.
9. Leave the Top and Front Access Doors open for visual confirmation of cassette
processing.

510779-1EN1
2.5.4.2 Cassette Setup
Set up a VITEK 2 Compact cassette as indicated in Figure 2-20, and then set the
cassette aside for later use.
Empty test tube 1 Test Card for TX1 & TX3 (ENG-9)
Figure 2-20: VITEK 2 Compact Engineering Test Cards Arrangement
2.5.4.3 Fill Cycle Test
1. At the User Interface Keypad Panel, press Status/Menu until the Main
Status screen appears.
2. Press Start Fill.
3. Confirm the GUI screen displays Filler status as Filling and a scrolling filling-in-
progress indicator.
4. Confirm that the Filler Status Indicator is illuminated with a solid blue arrow.
5. Upon completion of a successful vacuum cycle, confirm:
• an audible alarm sounds,
• the Filler status displays Complete,
• the Loader status displays Transfer, and
• the Filler Status Indicator changes to a flashing arrow.
6. Open and close the Filler Door. The Load Door unlocks.
Note: A maximum of 10 minutes is allowed before the cassette can no longer be loaded.
This countdown displays on the upper right corner of the GUI screen.

510779-1EN1
2.5.4.4 Cassette Scan Test
1. Open the Load Door and insert the prepared cassette.

2. Confirm the cassette icon displays on the GUI.
IMPORTANT: Do not close the door.
3. Quickly and without hesitation, place electrical tape (or equivalent) to block the
Load Door Optical Sensor. The door lock should engage and a solid blue arrow
appears at the Load Door Indicator.
Note: If an emergency stop (e-stop) occurs, ensure that tape is blocking the Load Door
Optical Sensor. Leave the cassette in the transport and then recycle power. Once
initialized, the instrument should begin processing the cassette.
4. Confirm that:
• from the GUI, the Loader status displays Reading Bar Code by reviewing
DML,
• the bar code scanner reads all 10 cards as “BAR CODE IS GOOD”,
• the instrument makes the “happy sound”, and
• the cassette bar code number displays on the User Interface screen.
2.5.4.5 Sealing and Cassette Removal Test
1. Confirm that:
• the Loader status changes to Sealing,
• the Filler status changes to Idle,
• all of the cards in the cassette progress smoothly past the sealer, and
• all of the cards are sealed.
2. Confirm that:
• the Loader status changes to Loading Card and
• all cards are loaded into the incubator without jamming or hitting the
carousel edges.
3. When the processed cassette returns to the Load Station, confirm that the
Loader status changes to Remove and that the Load Door indicator arrow is
blinking.
4. Remove the electrical tape from the Load Door Sensor.
5. Remove the cassette from the instrument. Confirm the arrow is no longer
illuminated and the cassette is no longer displayed on the GUI screen.
6. Close the Load Door and confirm that the door locks.
7. Repeat Section 2.5.4.2, Cassette Setup through Section 2.5.4.5, Sealing and
Cassette Removal Test, as needed.

510779-1EN1
Note: The filler can be cycled when a cassette is processing through the transport;
however, no more than one filler cycle can be performed per cassette processing in
transport.
2.5.4.6 Card Reading and Unload into Waste Container Test
1. Confirm proper exchange of the cards between each position of the Carousel
and the Reader. The cards should exit the Carousel and go onto the belt of the
Reader smoothly without hitting any rollers. Each card should also exit the
Reader without hitting the sides of the Carousel or causing the Quad to move
as the card is reinserted.
2. Type DUMP_CM 0 and press Enter. (The alias macro is caramap.)
3. Confirm that all of the cards show a Read Count of at least 1. Press Spacebar
as necessary to display all of the cards.
4. After all of the cards are read at least once (as indicated by the read count of 1
or greater), type UNLOAD and press Enter.
5. Confirm that all cards are unloaded into the Waste Container without jamming
or retries.
6. Confirm that all of the transfer tube stub lengths are 1.25 mm ±0.25 mm
(0.049 in. ±0.010 in.) with no stringing of plastic.
7. At the User Interface Keypad Panel, press STATUS/MENU until the
Main Menu appears.
8. Select Maintenance > Unlock User Access Door > Yes. The User Access Door
unlocks.
9. Remove the electrical tape (or equivalent) from the Front and Top Access Door
Optical Sensors.
10. Remove the dark, lint-free cloth from the optics.
11. Close the top and then the Front Access Doors. The Access Door locks.
12. Re-connect the data end of the VT2c-PC Y Cable to the host PC as shown in
Figure 2-4.
13. Type COLD and press Enter. Confirm that the instrument initializes properly
and no errors or warnings occur. (For more information see the General
Instrument Information on page 2-25).
14. Confirm remote diagnostic access. Refer to Chapter 6, Accessing DML using
Remote-Anything.
15. Once complete, remember to disable the Host Computer modem access.

510779-1EN1
System Setup Software Login and Alarm Message Review
2.6 Software Login and Alarm Message Review
1. Open the VITEK 2 Compact application software by double clicking on the

desktop V2C icon.
2. Log in by typing the following.
• User ID: LabAdmin
• Password: labadmin
3. Click the Instrument/System Alarm Status button found at the bottom of the
window. The Alarm/Message Instrument Status window appears.
4. Select the Current Alarm tab and review all of the messages, ensuring that all
issues are resolved.
5. Ensure the Acknowledge All Messages box is checked, and then click OK.
6. Close the VITEK 2 Compact application software. A window appears asking:
Do you really want to quit the application?
7. Click Yes.
8. Close any other applications including HyperTerminal.
9. Log off of the host PC from the windows taskbar by selecting Start > Log Off
Admin. A window appears asking:
Are you sure you want to log off?
10. Click Log Off. The Windows Log On window appears.

510779-1EN1
Software Login and Alarm Message Review System Setup

510779-1EN1
CHAPTER 3: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the basic functions of the instrument and its subsystems.
Chapter Contents
3.1 Overview • 3-2

3.2 Operation • 3-2
3.2.1 User Interface System • 3-3
3.2.2 Cassettes • 3-3
3.2.3 Filler Station • 3-5
3.2.4 Load/Unload Station • 3-6
3.2.5 Transport System • 3-7
3.2.6 Bar Code Reader Assembly • 3-8
3.2.7 Card Sealer Assembly • 3-9
3.2.8 Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station • 3-10
3.2.9 Incubator Heater Assembly • 3-11
3.2.10 Reader System • 3-11
3.2.11 Waste Collection Station • 3-12

510779-1EN1
Overview System Overview
3.1 Overview
The VITEK 2 Compact instrument is a semi-automated bacteriological testing system.

This design integrates incubation and optical measurement systems into a single
instrument for use in the identification and susceptibility testing of microorganisms.
Automation provided by the VITEK 2 Compact instrument includes transferring of

fluid to the test card, loading the card into the optical reader/incubator, and
disposing of the card once the test is complete. This instrument is comparable to the
existing VITEK 2 susceptibility test methods. Enhancements to the optical system
provide multi-wavelength capability.
Figure 3-1: VITEK 2 Compact Instrument
3.2 Operation
The VITEK 2 Compact integrated system is a combination of several independent

stations working together to optically scan test cards within a controlled temperature
environment. The major subsystem stations of the instrument are the Vacuum/Filler
Station, Load/Unload Station, Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station, and Waste
Collection Station.
The LCD User Interface Control Panel, located on the front of the instrument, allows
operator access through menu functions for normal setup and operation, and specific
menus for maintenance and troubleshooting.
The internal layout of the VITEK 2 Compact instrument consists of a sample

Processing Station and a Reader/Incubator. The operator loads test cards and test
tubes with prepared inoculum into a cassette (see Section 3.2.2, Cassettes for a
description of the cassettes).

510779-1EN1
System Overview Operation
The operator then places the cassette into the Filler Station for card filling. When the
fill cycle is complete, the operator transfers the cassette to the Load/Unload Station
for processing.
3.2.1 User Interface System

A keypad and screen (Figure 3-2) are located on the front of the VITEK 2 Compact
instrument. These in combination are referred to as the User Interface System. This
provides the user instrument status, instrument configuration, and notification of
instrument-related problems. Use the keypad to respond to instructions,
communicate commands to the VITEK 2 Compact instrument, and perform other
functions.
Figure 3-2: User Interface Keypad and Screen
For the use and operation of the User Interface, see the VITEK 2 Compact Instrument
User Manual (p/n 510772) for details.
3.2.2 Cassettes
The Transport System automatically moves the cassette (Figure 3-3) past the Bar
Code Scanner, where the bar codes are recorded into the instrument. The cassette is
fitted with a bar code identifying it to the instrument. Each cassette has a bar code
identification label numbered 1 through 9. Each card has a bar code that includes
information such as test type, lot number, expiration date, and a unique sequence
number. Patient identification test data entry may be made prior to placing the
cassette into the instrument. See the VITEK 2 Compact Instrument User Manual
(p/n 510772) for details.
The cassette is then moved back to the sealer where the hot wire cuts and seals the
transfer tube. Finally, the cassette is moved to the Autoloader Station where the cards
are transferred to the Incubator Carousel. An operational description of each
subsystem is discussed in this chapter. Component parts of each subsystem are
discussed in Chapter 4.

510779-1EN1
Operation System Overview
Figure 3-3: Loaded Cassette
WARNING
All of the materials in an empty cassette should be treated as
biohazards and disposed of accordingly. All organism suspensions
should be considered as potentially infectious. Qualified laboratory
personnel should use acceptable procedures for biohazardous material.
Figure 3-4 illustrates a block diagram of the VITEK 2 Compact instrument system flow
and station locations
Transport Station Incubator/Reader

Station
Cassette
Filler Station Waste Collection
Load/Unload
Station
Station
User Interface
Figure 3-4: VITEK 2 Compact Station Block Diagram

510779-1EN1
3.2.3 Filler Station

The Filler Station fills the wells of the card with an inoculum using vacuum
displacement. The operator places a cassette in the Filler Station, closes the door, and
presses the Start Fill function button to initiate the filling process.
The Filler Station uses a Vacuum Chamber and Pump. The rate of change in the
vacuum is regulated by a pneumatic servo-feedback system under microprocessor
control.
Figure 3-5: Filler Station Access Door Opened
When the cassette is placed in the Filler Station and the Start Fill function button is
pressed, the Vacuum Pump (Figure 3-6) starts evacuating the air from the Vacuum
Chamber. The air escapes from the card channels and wells via the transfer tubes and
bubbles up through the suspension. The channels and wells inside of each card are
then in a vacuum.

510779-1EN1
Figure 3-6: Vacuum Pump with Side Panel Removed
After a short period, the vacuum is slowly released in the Vacuum Chamber. The
increasing air pressure inside the chamber forces the suspension in each test tube
through the transfer tube and into the channels and wells of the card.
Once the cards are filled, the Filler LED Indicator flashes, and the user can open the
Filler Access Door and remove the cassette. When the Filler Door is open, the Load/
Unload Door will unlock to receive the cassette.
3.2.4 Load/Unload Station

When the cassette is placed into the Load/Unload Station and the door is closed, the
door locks and the cassette begins processing using the Transport System.

510779-1EN1
Figure 3-7: Load/Unload Station Door Opened
3.2.5 Transport System

The Transport System processes the cassette past the Bar Code Scanner that reads
the bar codes, the Sealer assembly that seals the transfer tubes, and the Autoloader
that loads the cards into the carousel, as described in the following sections.
The cassette then returns to the Load/Unload Station for removal from the system. It
is parked at the cassette Load/Unload Door with the door unlocked. When the LED
indicator light begins to flash, the operator can remove the cassette and dispose of
the processed test tubes. The transport block remains in place for the next cassette.

510779-1EN1
Transport
Assembly
Transport
Block
Figure 3-8: Transport Assembly
3.2.6 Bar Code Reader Assembly
Bar Code
Reader Assembly
Figure 3-9: Bar Code Reader Assembly
The Bar Code Reader is angled to read the bar code ID to identify the cassette to the
instrument. It is also used to read the card type to determine the optics scan method.

510779-1EN1
Figure 3-10: Bar Code Scanner
As the transported cassette and cards enter the Bar Code Reader area, the scanner
triggers to read the bar code information on the cassette and on a card for each slot
of the cassette. Each card is read as the cassette moves through this area. This
information is used by the instrument to determine the card types and the card
location within the cassette.
3.2.7 Card Sealer Assembly

The Card Sealer Assembly completes the functions inside the VITEK 2 Compact
instrument that prepare the test cards for reading and incubation. Before a test card
can be read and incubated, the wells and channels inside the card must be sealed off
from the outside environment. This is accomplished by heat-sealing the transfer tube
that delivered inoculum to the card from its test tube.
Sealer Assembly
without Front Panel
Figure 3-11: Sealer Assembly

510779-1EN1
As the cassette moves past the Sealer Assembly, a heated nichrome wire comes in
contact with each transfer tube. The plastic tube melts, causing the majority of it to
separate from the card and drop into the test tube. The portion that remains in the
card is sealed by the melting plastic. The heat-sealed stub that is left in the card from
the transfer tube is 1.25 mm ±0.25 mm long.
3.2.8 Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station

After the cards are filled, read by the Bar Code Reader, and sealed, the cassette
moves to the Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station. The components of this
station are the Autoloader Assembly, the Carousel Incubator, and the Reader Optics
System (Figure 3-12).
Incubator
Optics
Autoloader
Figure 3-12: Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station
When a cassette reaches the card loading station, the cards are transferred (pushed)
from the cassette into the slots of the 30- or 60-position carousel by the Autoloader.
Here they are incubated at a temperature of 35.5 °C ±1 °C (95.9 ºF ±1.8 ºF).
Note: The Carousel is divided into four sections, so the components can be easily removed
for periodic cleaning. (See the VITEK 2 Compact Instrument User Manual p/n
510772 for details.)
As the Carousel rotates, each card moves into the reading position every 15 minutes.
A card ejector pushes the card onto a Drive Belt, where it is moved through the
Reader Station. After the reading cycle is complete, the card returns to its slot in the
Carousel, where it continues incubation until the next reading.
Once the cards are loaded into the Carousel in the Incubator, the cassette containing
processed patient isolate tubes returns to the Load/Unload Station for removal from
the instrument. The cassette parks at the cassette Load Door with the door unlocked
and the operator is notified by the flashing Load/Unload LED. The operator can then
remove the cassette and dispose of the processed test tubes. The Transport Block
remains in place for the next cassette.

510779-1EN1
3.2.9 Incubator Heater Assembly

The carousel contains a heater and two circulating fans used to incubate the test
cards. The temperature is monitored and controlled by two remote precision
thermistors monitored by an A/D converter. These inputs are compared to voltages
produced by high-precision resistors. This enables the temperature at the card to be
held at an average of 35.5 °C ±1 °C (95.9 ºF ±1.8 ºF).
Solid-State Relay
Circulating Fan
Incubator Heater
Circulating Fan
Figure 3-13: Heater Assembly
3.2.10 Reader System

The VITEK 2 Compact Reader System is made up of a motor-driven Card Drive Belt
system, two Transmittance Optical Assemblies, and a Cam Assembly. The optical
systems are modular, with each module independently controlled by a
microprocessor. This area is accessible to the user for maintenance functions. (See
the VITEK 2 Compact Instrument User Manual p/n 510772 for maintenance details.)
Transmittance
Optics
Figure 3-14: Reader System Optics

510779-1EN1
The VITEK 2 Compact instrument performs its identification and susceptibility

analyses by continually monitoring the growth of organisms inside the wells of the
test cards.
The Transmittance Optics use visible light to directly measure organism growth.
These optics are based on an initial light reading of a well before significant growth
has begun. Periodic light transmittance samplings of the same well measure
organism growth by how much light is prevented from going through the well.
The optics use light emitting diodes (LEDs) that produce light at 660 nm, 568 nm,
and 428 nm and silicon photodetectors to capture the transmitted light. The system
is self-calibrating to 100% transmission through air.
Figure 3-15: Transmittance Optics Cross Section
3.2.11 Waste Collection Station

Once testing of a card is complete, the card is removed automatically from the
carousel by the Card Ejector. It then advances through the Reader System and is
deposited into the Waste Bin. These cards are collected at the Waste Collection
Station for removal and disposal.
A Waste Collection Bin level icon on the user interface displays the level of cards in
the bin. The system sends a message to the User Interface Panel when the Waste
Station Bin is full. The bin can then be removed from the instrument and emptied.
The Waste Collection Station collects and holds up to 60 cards for disposal. However,
it is recommend that the bin is checked and emptied before it reaches capacity.
Access the Waste Collection Station through the door on the front of the VITEK 2
Compact instrument (Figure 3-16).

510779-1EN1
Figure 3-16: Waste Collection Station Door Open
CAUTION: Ejected cards cannot be reinserted into the VITEK 2 Compact

instrument. Make sure that all card processing is complete before
ejecting a card.
The Waste Collection Door should remain closed when cards are not being removed
from the station.
WARNING
Although VITEK 2 Compact test cards are sealed, they should be
treated as biohazards and disposed of accordingly.

510779-1EN1

510779-1EN1
CHAPTER 4: SYSTEM COMPONENTS
About This Chapter
This chapter is designed to familiarize the user with the five major systems of the
VITEK 2 Compact instrument. Information from the previous chapter explained the
workflow through the various stations of the instrument. In this chapter, we provide
more detailed descriptions of the individual component parts of each system and
their functions.
The VITEK 2 Compact instrument is made up of the following systems:

• Interface System
• Vacuum/Filler Station
• Card Transport System
• Reader/Incubator Processing System
• Waste Collection System
Note: Always refer to the latest drawing revision. (See Table 4-1, Reference Documents.)
Chapter Contents
4.1 Reference Documents • 4-3

4.2 VITEK 2 Compact Interface System • 4-3
4.2.1 Instrument User Interface System • 4-3
4.2.2 Menu System • 4-5
4.2.3 VITEK 2 Compact Status Screen • 4-6
4.2.4 Filler Status • 4-8
4.2.4.1 Idle • 4-8
4.2.4.2 Filling • 4-8
4.2.4.3 Complete • 4-9
4.2.4.4 Not Ready • 4-9
4.2.5 Loader Status • 4-9
4.2.5.1 Empty Status • 4-9
4.2.5.2 Transfer • 4-10
4.2.5.3 Reading Bar Code • 4-10
4.2.5.4 Sealing • 4-10
4.2.5.5 Loading Card • 4-10
4.2.5.6 Remove • 4-10
4.2.5.7 Virtual Cassette Icon • 4-11
4.2.5.8 Cassette Number • 4-11
4.2.5.9 Countdown Timer • 4-11
4.2.6 General Status • 4-11
4.2.7 Information and Warning Indicators • 4-11
4.2.7.1 Door Opened Indicator • 4-11
4.2.7.2 UPS Status • 4-11
4.2.7.3 UPS Battery • 4-12
4.2.7.4 Waste Collection Bin Not Present • 4-12
4.2.7.5 Waste Collection Bin Level • 4-12
4.2.7.6 Host Communication Failure • 4-12

510779-1EN1
System Components
4.2.7.7 Instrument Name • 4-12

4.2.7.8 Available Slots • 4-12
4.2.7.9 Cassette Presence • 4-12
4.2.7.10 Carousel Quad Missing • 4-12
4.2.7.11 New Error/Warning Indicator • 4-13
4.2.7.12 21 CFR 11 Unauthorized Indicator • 4-13
4.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply (Optional) • 4-13
4.4 Host/Workstation Computer • 4-14
4.5 Vacuum/Filler Station • 4-15
4.6 Card Transport System • 4-20
4.6.1 Cassettes • 4-20
4.6.2 Cassette Load/Unload Station • 4-21
4.6.2.1 Transport Assembly • 4-22
4.7 Bar Code Reader Assembly • 4-23
4.7.1 Card Sealer Assembly • 4-23
4.7.2 Autoloader Assembly • 4-24
4.8 Reader/Incubator Processing System • 4-25
4.8.1 Carousel Card Ejector • 4-25
4.8.2 Carousel Incubator • 4-25
4.8.2.1 Incubator Temperature Control • 4-27
4.8.3 Reader System • 4-28
4.8.3.1 Transmittance (TX) Optical System • 4-29
4.8.3.2 Waste Collection Station • 4-30
4.9 System Electronics • 4-32
4.9.1 BCB Board • 4-33
4.9.2 Head Control Board • 4-34
4.9.3 Sample Prep Node Board • 4-34
4.9.4 DC Power Distribution Board • 4-35
4.9.5 User Interface Board • 4-36
4.9.6 Power Supply • 4-37

510779-1EN1
System Components Reference Documents
4.1 Reference Documents
Note: Always refer to the latest drawing revision.
Document
Document
Number
531602 VITEK 2 Compact System Electronics Jumper and Test Point

Specifications
4.2 VITEK 2 Compact Interface System
The VITEK 2 Compact Interface System is made up of the following primary

components:
• Instrument User Interface System
• Host/Workstation Computer
• Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) (optional
4.2.1 Instrument User Interface System

The Instrument User Interface System consists of the User Interface Board, Keypad,
Display, Display Backlight, and Speaker. It is a collection of instrument components
that is intended to communicate with the user. Information is conveyed to the user
via the display and speaker. The instrument receives information from the user via
the keypad.
The keypad and screen are located on the front of the instrument and provide the
user with instrument status, configuration, and notification of instrument-related
problems. An audible alarm feature and a flashing display alert the user in the event
of instrument alarm conditions.
The keypad is composed of a set of numeric digit keys and several function keys for
the user to communicate commands to the instrument. The screen is a backlit Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD). Five function buttons are located beside the LCD. The screen
provides the visual information during normal operation and user intervention.
The keypad and screen allow the user functional support of the following:
• Local instrument operation and system status
• Diagnostics and maintenance operations
• Configuration options
• Intervention and error messages

510779-1EN1
VITEK 2 Compact Interface System System Components
}
Figure 4-1: Keypad and Screen
The user interface keypad and screen have the following components:
Table 4-2: Interface Keypad
1 Function Buttons Use these buttons to select menu options or other

specified functions.
2 Numeric Keys Use these keys to enter a number onto a screen.
3 Status/Menu Key Use this key to provide access to selection of either

the Status screen or Menu screen or to access the
Status screen from any screen.
4 Previous Screen Key Use this key to:

• Exit this screen or function to its menu
• Return to a previous screen in a function
• Go from a sub-menu to its previous menu
• Go from the Main Menu to the Status Screen
5 Message Key Press this key anytime to access the Message

Queue.
6 Arrow Keys Use these keys to:

• Scroll a screen or menu
• Move the cursor on a screen
Note: When Arrow keys are active, their icons
appear on the display

510779-1EN1
System Components VITEK 2 Compact Interface System
4.2.2 Menu System

All of the functions used on the VITEK 2 Compact instrument are available through
the User Interface Menu System. The system is composed of a Main Menu and a set
of five sub-menus. Figure 4-2 shows the Main Menu.
Figure 4-2: VITEK 2 Compact Main Menu
Figure 4-3 depicts the menu structure with all of the function options added. The
lines show the menus and the pathways between them.
This diagram describes the pathway to a specific function by naming each menu to
access, with the menus separated by arrows.
Example: the pathway to clean the carousel on the Maintenance menu would be
shown as follows:
Main Menu > Maintenance > Remove Carousel

510779-1EN1
Main Menu
QC Status Maintenance Diagnostics Configuration Error Handling
Unlock User Access D oor Temperature Instrument Name Cancel Cassette
Incu bator
Rem ove Carousel Cabinet Da te Format
Replace Carousel Ve rsions Sch edule QC Status
System Number
Optics Cleaning Alert Options
Serial N umbar
Carousel Capacity
Firmware BCB All
Te mperature Check
Fill Compl ete
Firmware BCB Boot
Intervention
Carousel SPN
Shutdown Error in Qu eue
Vacuum / Sealer
Warning in Queue
Front Panel SPN
Load Timeout Warning
Transport SPN
Timeout W arning; Reading Paused
Ale rt Volumes
Last Maintenance Date
All
Optics Self Test Fill Complete
Cassette Success
Cassette Exception
Sub-system Error Status
Intervention
Error in Queue
Warning in Queue
Load Tim eout Warning
Tim eout W arning; Read ing Pa used
Dis play Options
LCD Screen Contrast

Keyclick Volume
Figure 4-3: Main Menu Diagram
4.2.3 VITEK 2 Compact Status Screen

The Status screen is used more often than any other screen in the VITEK 2 Compact
User Interface. Since it is basic to the workflow, the Status screen is easy to display
and, in many cases, it displays automatically. (Figure 4-4 shows the Status Screen.)
This section details the various icons and informational messages that you see while
operating the instrument.
There are three ways to display the Status screen:

• The Status screen automatically displays at the end of the instrument’s power-up
initialization process.
• Press the Status/Menu or Previous Screen key from the Main Menu.
• Press the Status/Menu key from any menu or from the Error Message Queue
screen.
The Status field appears at the bottom of the VITEK 2 Compact Status screen.

510779-1EN1
Figure 4-4: Instrument Status Field
The white section at the bottom of the screen may contain three types of
information:
• New Error/Warning Indicator (!). See Section 4.2.7.11, New Error/Warning
Indicator.
• Instrument Status (in the previous figure, OK)
• Current Time of the day in 24-hour format. This time is based on the Host/
Workstation Computer time (in the previous figure, 10:35).
The Instrument Status field displays the following:
• OK. All of the subsystems in the instrument are working normally, and the
instrument is ready to accept test cards for processing.
• Warming. This status displays after instrument startup or any time the incubation
temperature in the Reader Station has not reached its specified temperature. The
instrument can still process cards when the status Warming is active.
• Error. The instrument is in an error state and needs user intervention or service.
Refer to the VITEK 2 Compact Instrument User Manual (p/n 510772), Chapter 6,
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting and Appendix C, Instrument Error Code User
Response Table when the Status Error is active. Also refer to Drawing 532610
and Chapter 6 of this manual for General Instrument Troubleshooting
Information (Table 6-6) and applicable DML commands.
• Maintenance. At least one maintenance item is initiated, such as a carousel
section was removed for cleaning. In this case, test card processing cannot
resume unless all carousel sections are replaced.
• Intervention. The Intervention warning displays if there is an error during power-
up or card cassette processing that needs the user’s immediate attention. (Refer
to the Intervention Screen in Chapter 6 of the VITEK 2 Compact Instrument User
Manual (p/n 510772) for details.)

510779-1EN1
4.2.4 Filler Status

The Filler Status includes a Filler Status indicator on the left and a possible Detailed
Message/Action on the right. If there are any warnings or errors related to filling the
cards, an Intervention screen appears.
4.2.4.1 Idle
When the display reads Filler: Idle, the instrument is ready to start the fill cycle.
The Start Fill function is shown on the upper-right side of the screen. Press the Start
Fill key to initiate the fill cycle.
Figure 4-5: Status Screen Showing Filler Ready
4.2.4.2 Filling
The screen displays Filler: Filling when the filling process has started. The Filling-in-
Progress indicator displays (Figure 4-6) to indicate filling.
Figure 4-6: Filling-in-Progress Indicator
This indicator overwrites the Start Fill box, and tells the user that the cards are filling.
It does not show the actual progress or stage of the filling cycle. When the entire bar
is filled, it repeats from the beginning until the fill cycle is complete.
CAUTION: If individual cards are exposed to multiple fill cycles, these

cards must be discarded as the test results will be inaccurate.

510779-1EN1
4.2.4.3 Complete
The Filler: Complete indicator shows that the fill cycle is done, and the cassette is
ready for transfer into the Loader. This Filler: Complete indicator displays regardless
of fill success or failure, and the instrument provides an alert to indicate that the fill is
complete. This alert can be audible and/or blinking, depending on the custom
settings.
4.2.4.4 Not Ready
When the Filler: Not Ready indicator displays, the instrument cannot start the filling
cycle, because either the Filler is not ready or there is a fault condition in the Filler or
in the instrument.
Reasons for a Not Ready filler status include:

• Instrument Overall Status is in Error state.
• Instrument Overall Status is in Maintenance state.
• 21 CFR is enabled and the workstation has timed out.
WARNING
Biohazardous spills can occur inside the VITEK 2 Compact
instrument. All organism suspensions should be considered as
potentially infectious.
4.2.5 Loader Status

The Loader Status sub-screen is comprised of two parts:
• Loader Status on the left and
• a display area for messages on the immediate right.
Based on the workflow, under error-free conditions, the Loader Status proceeds as
follows:
Empty Status > Transfer Cassette > Bar Code Reading > Sealing > Loading
into Carousel > Remove Cassette
If there are errors during cassette processing in the Loader, an Intervention screen
appears. The following messages display during normal instrument operation.
4.2.5.1 Empty Status
When there is no status in the Loader field, the loader is not ready for the user to
load a cassette, and the Loader Door is locked.

510779-1EN1
4.2.5.2 Transfer
When the Loader: Transfer message displays, the filling cycle is complete and the
user should transfer the cassette from the Filler Station to the Loader Station. A
maximum of 10 minutes is allowed to transfer the cassette. After this time period, the
system no longer accepts the cards. This countdown is visible in the upper-right
corner of the screen.
CAUTION: When there is less than one minute left to transfer the
cassette, the instrument sounds an alert to indicate a Load Timed Out
Warning. If the time has expired, an Intervention Message appears to
alert the user to discard the test cards.
4.2.5.3 Reading Bar Code
When the Loader: Reading Bar Code message displays, the cassette is in the Loader,
and the instrument is processing the cassette and checking the readability of all bar
codes.
The instrument provides an alert for Cassette Success, if the cassette setup is OK, as
well as a unique alert for Cassette Exception if the cassette setup has non-
correctable errors.
4.2.5.4 Sealing
The Loader: Sealing message indicates that the instrument successfully read the bar
codes, and the instrument continues to process the card cassette for sealing.
4.2.5.5 Loading Card
The Loader: Loading Card message means that the sealing is complete, and the
instrument is loading cards into the carousel.
4.2.5.6 Remove
When Loader: Remove message displays, the instrument has finished processing the
cards in the cassette, and the cassette is ready to be removed. However, if there are
still cards remaining in the cassette, an error condition has occurred and the user was
not able to fix the error.

510779-1EN1
4.2.5.7 Virtual Cassette Icon
In a Virtual Cassette workflow, this icon displays to the right of the Loader Status after
the instrument has successfully read the bar codes of the cassette and all of the
cards.
4.2.5.8 Cassette Number
The icon displays to the right of the Loader Status after successful bar code reading
and the cassette number is known.
4.2.5.9 Countdown Timer
A countdown timer in the upper, right corner of any screen displays in the Start Fill
field and indicates the total number of minutes and seconds left for the user to
transfer the cassette from the Filler to the Loader. The continuation of this counter is
used when any other Intervention Message displays.
4.2.6 General Status

The General Status sub-screen uses various icons to display messages that alert the
user to general conditions. Users should become familiar with these indicators to
ensure smooth operation of the instrument.
Note: Some of these indicators or icons are only visible on the screen when the function
they represent is active.
4.2.7 Information and Warning Indicators
4.2.7.1 Door Opened Indicator
At least one of the following doors is opened:

• Top User Access Door
• Front User Access Door
• Waste Collection Door
4.2.7.2 UPS Status
UPS is present, and there is a power failure.

510779-1EN1
4.2.7.3 UPS Battery
UPS is present, and the battery is low.
4.2.7.4 Waste Collection Bin Not Present
The Waste Collection Bin is not present in the instrument.
4.2.7.5 Waste Collection Bin Level
This icon indicates the level of cards in the Waste Collection Bin. When the waste
collection bin is replaced, the icon displays an empty waste collection bin icon.
4.2.7.6 Host Communication Failure
This icon indicates that the Host/Workstation Computer is not communicating with
the instrument.
4.2.7.7 Instrument Name
The name of the instrument as input by the user.
4.2.7.8 Available Slots
This icon indicates the number of available slots in the carousel. The number range is
zero to 30 or zero to 60, depending on the instrument model.
The Available Slots field indicates the number of unoccupied slots in the instrument.
You can load one or more cassettes containing up to that number of test cards. If you
load more than that number, the instrument will not process some of the test cards
unless additional slots become available by the time the test cards reach the
carousel.
4.2.7.9 Cassette Presence
The cassette is present in the Loader Station.
4.2.7.10 Carousel Quad Missing
At least one quadrousel is missing in the Carousel.

510779-1EN1
System Components Uninterruptible Power Supply (Optional)
4.2.7.11 New Error/Warning Indicator
This indicator displays to the left of the Instrument Status if there are messages (both
errors and warnings) in the Error Message Queue that the user has not viewed. This
indicator moves from side to side on the screen. The instrument sounds an alert and/
or the screen blinks (depending on the configuration settings) if there is an error or
warning in the queue. Press the Message key (!) to view the Error Message Queue.
The screen below displays the message queue indicator’s warning icon (bottom left).
Figure 4-7: Message Queue Indicator (Warning Mode)
4.2.7.12 21 CFR 11 Unauthorized Indicator
When the instrument operation is not authorized due to 21 CFR 11, a small
unauthorized indicator displays on the upper-right corner of the screen. When the
instrument is in this state, several functions and screens are not accessible and a
message appears if the user attempts to access them.
For more information, refer to the VITEK 2 Compact Online Software User Manual
(p/n 510773).
4.3 Uninterruptible Power Supply (Optional)
The UPS is provided as an option and is connected to a 9-pin communications port

located on the left rear corner of the instrument via a RS232 cable. See Figure 4-8 for
the location of the port connection.
In the event of a power failure, the UPS signals the VITEK 2 Compact instrument. If
the power failure lasts longer than five seconds, the instrument goes into a Power
Failure mode.

510779-1EN1
Host/Workstation Computer System Components
The instrument then:

• Initiates a Power Failure error message and displays a Power Fail icon on the
Main Status screen.
• Continues processing test cards in the carousel.
• Continues to support the card Transport System’s previously filled cassettes, but
does not allow you to fill new cassettes.
Host PC
Communication Port
UPS Connection Port
Figure 4-8: UPS and Host PC Communication Port Locations
4.4 Host/Workstation Computer
The Host/Workstation Computer (Figure 4-9) is a central diagnostic station. It is

connected to a 25-pin communication port located on the left rear corner of the
instrument via an RS232 cable (Figure 4-8). Under normal conditions, the instrument
sends system status, test card data, and operational data to the Workstation. The
Workstation serves as the instrument supervisory control, test data storage, system
status information, and data entry for the instrument. Should the computer fail, the
VITEK 2 Compact instrument is capable of sequentially buffering 2184 card readings
(60 cards for 36.4 hours) before the oldest data begins dropping off.
Refer to Drawing 531602 for the proper workstation connector voltage test point
outputs.

510779-1EN1
System Components Vacuum/Filler Station
Figure 4-9: Host Computer and Printer
4.5 Vacuum/Filler Station
The Vacuum/Filler Station is the first station of the VITEK 2 Compact instrument that
receives a prepared cassette with test cards and prepared inoculum in test tubes (see
Cassettes on page 4-20 for further cassette information).
The Vacuum/Filler Station fills the test cards with the inoculum solution contained in
the corresponding test tubes, using vacuum displacement inside the Vacuum
Chamber.
Figure 4-10 shows the Vacuum Station Door in the open position. Figure 4-11 shows
the Vacuum Chamber from the inside of the instrument.
The Vacuum/Filler Station consists of a Vacuum Chamber and Door, a Filler LED
Indicator, a Vacuum Pump, a Vacuum Sealer SPN Board with a Mounted Pressure
Transducer, a Solid-State Relay (mounted inside the Rear Panel Assembly), a
Proportional Valve, a Three-Way Valve, an Air Filter, and associated pneumatic
components.
Figure 4-12 shows the Vacuum Pump and Three-Way Valve Assembly (Proportional
Valve, Three-Way Valve, and Air Filter (mounted in the instrument).

510779-1EN1
Vacuum/Filler Station System Components
Figure 4-10: Vacuum Chamber Door Opened
Vacuum Chamber
Figure 4-11: Vacuum Chamber

510779-1EN1
Figure 4-12: Vacuum Station Vacuum Pump (Side View)
The Vacuum Chamber is part of the molded plastic Front Panel of the instrument and
cannot be removed or replaced individually. The chamber is designed such that a
cassette can only be installed with the cassette hand grip facing outward. The
Vacuum Chamber has a seal surrounding the door.
Figure 4-13 shows the pneumatic diagram for the Vacuum/Filler Station.

510779-1EN1
Vacuum/Filler Station System Components
Figure 4-13: Filler Station Pneumatic Diagram
The operator places the loaded cassette into the chamber, closes the door, and
presses the Start Fill button on the User Interface. The Fill Indicator LED illuminates a
curved solid blue arrow, the User Interface displays an activity bar, and the filler cycle
begins. Once complete, the Filler LED illuminates a curved flashing blue arrow.
The operator has 10 minutes to transfer the cassette to the Load/Unload Station.
When the Filler Door is open the Load/Unload Door unlocks, awaiting the insertion of
the filled cassette (Table 4-3 shows the LED Fill Indicator Status).
Table 4-3: Fill Indicator Status
Indicator Light (LED) Status
OFF Filler Idle
Solid Blue Arrow Cards are Filling
Blue Blinking Arrow Filling Cycle Complete with No Errors
X (Red LED) Filling Error
When the Vacuum Pump is turned on during the fill cycle, it begins drawing free air
through the Filter/Muffler attached to the Three-Way Solenoid Valve. To fill the test
card, the following sequence occurs:
1. The Proportional Valve opens 100%.

510779-1EN1
2. The three-way, direct-acting solenoid energizes, and air is evacuated or

pumped out of the Vacuum Chamber through the Air Filter and the Three-Way
Solenoid Valve.
3. The Absolute Pressure Transducer monitors the decrease of Vacuum Chamber
pressure and sends a proportional, continuously changing voltage output to the
SPN Board.
4. The SPN Board samples the continuously changing voltage signal at regular
intervals, and compares the rate of change to the programmed rate to pump
down the Vacuum Chamber (approximately 30 seconds).
5. A voltage signal is sent to the Proportional Valve, causing the Proportional
Valve to incrementally close.
6. When the Vacuum Chamber is evacuated to the pre-calibrated vacuum target
pressure (0.89 PSIA ±0.04 PSIA), the Vacuum Pump turns off, the Three-Way
Solenoid Valve closes, and the Proportional Valve closes for a total of five
seconds. The Absolute Pressure Transducer continues to monitor the Vacuum
Chamber pressure for leaks and sends the voltage signal to the SPN Board.
Note: Air is forced from inside the test card via the transfer tube and bubbles up through
the suspension. The channels and wells inside the test card are now in a vacuum.
7. After five seconds, the Proportional Valve gradually opens to raise the pressure
inside the Vacuum Chamber. The Absolute Pressure Transducer continues to
monitor the Vacuum Chamber pressure and sends the voltage signal to the
SPN Board. The SPN Board samples the continuously changing voltage at
regular intervals and compares it to the programmed rate of return to
atmospheric pressure (approximately 30 seconds).
8. A voltage signal is sent to the Proportional Valve, causing the Proportional
Valve to incrementally open and then level off at the preset value.
Note: The increasing air pressure inside the Vacuum Chamber forces the suspension in
each test tube to flow through the transfer tube and into the channels and wells of
the card.
9. The Proportional Valve opens 100% at the completion of the return to

atmospheric pressure.
10. The Proportional Valve closes, and the system is ready to run again.
Throughout the entire cycle, the air pressure inside the Vacuum Chamber is
monitored to ensure that the rate of pressure change and the maximum vacuum
value are maintained without boiling the sample.

510779-1EN1
Card Transport System System Components
Figure 4-14: Theoretical Vacuum Cycle Chart (Reference Only)
4.6 Card Transport System
The VITEK 2 Compact Card Transport System is made up of the following primary
internal components:
• Cassette
• Cassette Load/Unload Station
• Transport Assembly
• Bar Code Reader Assembly
• Card Sealer Assembly
• Autoloader Assembly
4.6.1 Cassettes
The Cassette is the main component of the Transport System. The Cassettes are pre-
loaded external to the instrument with tubes of inoculum and test cards, and then
placed in the Filler Station for filling.
The Cassette holds a maximum of 10 test cards in specially fitted slots. The front
portion of the Cassette has 10 wells for the inoculum test tubes. The Cassette is
placed into the Load/Unload Station for transport through the instrument. The special
shape of the Cassette matches the shape of the station well, ensuring that the
Cassette is properly loaded.

510779-1EN1
System Components Card Transport System
Figure 4-15: Cassette Loaded with Cards
4.6.2 Cassette Load/Unload Station

Cassettes are placed into and removed from the cassette Load/Unload Station. The
station consists of a cassette Load Door, a Load/Unload LED Indicator, and a door-
locking solenoid.
Cassettes are loaded into the open door at the Load/Unload Station. When the Load
Door is closed, the door locks and a load indicator LED appears as a solid blue arrow.
Test card processing automatically initiates.
Note: The Load/Unload Door remains locked if the instrument is in an idle state, such as
no cards have been filled or whenever a cassette is moving through the Load/
Unload Station (Table 4-4 shows the LED Load Indicator Status).
Once the cards are processed and loaded into the incubator, the Cassette containing
processed isolate tubes returns to the Load/Unload Station for removal from the
system. The Cassette parks at the cassette Load Door with the door unlocked, and
the operator is notified by the flashing load indicator LED. The operator can then
remove the Cassette and dispose of the processed test tubes. When the Cassette is
removed and the Load Door is closed, the door locks.

510779-1EN1
Card Transport System System Components
Table 4-4: Load Indicator Status
Indicator Light (LED) Status
Off Either the loader is idle and the door is locked, or it is ready
to load a cassette and the door is unlocked.
Solid Blue Arrow Cards are processing in the station and the cassette Load
Door is locked and cannot be opened.
Blue Blinking Arrow The cassette is ready to be removed from the station. The
cassette Load Door is unlocked. When you remove the
cassette and close the door, the indicator LED turns off.
X (Red LED) Indicates a processing error.
4.6.2.1 Transport Assembly
The Transport Assembly moves the Cassette by pulling it through each process
station within the instrument. Various sensors tell the instrument where the cassette
is located and the status of the transport system.
Transport Assembly
Figure 4-16: Transport Assembly with Instrument Front Removed
The Transport Assembly consists of a Transport Drive Nut Mechanism, which is

moved by a motor-driven drive screw and slides across an engagement slide guide
rod. The Transport Assembly also includes a Home Reflective Sensor located in the
back of the transport and a Cassette Encoder Board with three mounted Optical
Sensors.
The cassette is first detected by a Reflective Sensor mounted to the incubator nearest
the Load Door. When the door is closed the Transport Drive Nut Mechanism steps the
Cassette back and detects the individual test cards using the second Card Reflective
Sensor mounted to the incubator. The cassette is then transported to each station by
continually referencing and monitoring the three optical sensors on the Cassette
Encoder Board.

510779-1EN1
System Components Bar Code Reader Assembly
4.7 Bar Code Reader Assembly
While passing the Bar Code Reader Assembly, the cassette bar code identification
label is read first. Then the Cassette is indexed toward the back of the instrument so
the light beam from the Bar Code Reader can scan the test card’s bar code
information. Figure 4-17 shows the Bar Code Reader.
Note: The Bar Code Reader inside the instrument has no lasers and is certified to
IEC60825-1 LED Safety: Class 1.
Figure 4-17: Bar Code Reader
4.7.1 Card Sealer Assembly

Before the instrument can incubate and read a test card, the wells must be sealed off
from the outside environment. The Card Sealer Hot Wire comes in contact with each
transfer tube, causing the plastic to melt, sealing the transfer tube that delivered the
inoculum to the card from the test tube.
After the cassette ID and test card bar code reading completes successfully, a hot wire
from the Sealer Station drops down and begins heating. As the cassette moves
through the Sealer Station, the hot wire melts and cuts the transfer tube. The majority
of the transfer tube then falls into its associated test tube. Remaining in the test card
is the sealed stub that extends 1.25 mm ±0.25 mm from the card’s edge. Once all
cards are sealed, the hot wire retracts back into a wire shield housing, where it cools.
Note: In the event of a halted transport, the sealer wire also retracts and stops heating until
the problem is corrected.
The Sealer Assembly consists of a Housing Unit, a Sealer Motor to raise and lower a
drive block, a Sealer Connector Assembly, a Nicrome Wire (Sealer Hot Wire), a Sealer
Hot Wire Cable, and an Optical Sensor used to reference the hot wire up/down
position. The Sealer Assembly is controlled by the Vacuum/Sealer SPN Board.

510779-1EN1
Bar Code Reader Assembly System Components
Sealer Assembly
Figure 4-18: Card Sealer Station
4.7.2 Autoloader Assembly

Test cards transported and processed at the Sealer Assembly are transferred into the
slots of the carousel at the Autoloader Assembly. The Autoloader consists of an
Optical Home Sensor, Drive Nut, and Card Pusher moved by a motor-driven drive
screw across an alignment bar. Figure 4-19 shows the Autoloader Station.
When a cassette reaches the card loading station, each card is pushed by the
Autoloader from the cassette into a slot of the carousel. Then the Autoloader retracts
back to the Autoloader Home Sensor.
Autoloader
Figure 4-19: Incubator Autoloader Station

510779-1EN1
System Components Reader/Incubator Processing System
4.8 Reader/Incubator Processing System
The VITEK 2 Compact Reader/Incubator Processing System is made up of one set of

the following primary internal components:
• Carousel Card Ejector
• Carousel Incubator
• Reader System
• Waste Collection Station
4.8.1 Carousel Card Ejector

After the cards are loaded into the carousel, they must complete their first read. Then,
each card is read at 15-minute intervals from its first read. Initially, this time may vary
if more than one cassette is loaded. For the card to be read, the Card Ejector must
push the card out of the Carousel onto the Reader Belt and Reader Ledge.
The Card Ejector Assembly consists of an Ejector Guide, Ejector Blade, Card Ejector
Motor, Tray Drive Gear, and Ejector Home Sensor.
The Card Ejector Motor turns a rack gear attached to the Card Ejector Blade. The
motor fully extends the Card Ejector Blade, which pushes the card from the Carousel
to the Reader. The Ejector Blade then retracts to the Ejector Home Sensor.
Ejector Assembly
Figure 4-20: Carousel Card Ejector
4.8.2 Carousel Incubator

The Carousel Incubator is comprised of a rotating carousel capable of holding 60 test
cards contained inside an Incubation Chamber with a Heater, two Thermistors, two
Manual Reset Thermostats, a Solid-State Relay, and two Circulating Fans. An
Incubator Motor for the Carousel and an Incubator SPN Board are located outside the
Incubation Chamber at the rear of the Carousel Incubator.

510779-1EN1
Reader/Incubator Processing System System Components
The temperature inside the Incubator is controlled at an average of 35.5 °C ±1 °C

(95.9 ºF ±1.8 ºF). The Carousel holds the test cards throughout the complete
incubation cycle. The cards are removed from the Carousel once every 15 minutes for
optical measuring. The Carousel is divided into four sections, called Quadrants. Each
Carousel Quadrant can be removed independently for easy cleaning.
The firmware defaults the Carousel capacity to 30 cards. If an optional Hardware Key
is installed onto the Bay Controller Board, the maximum capacity of the carousel is
60 test cards.
Positioning the carousel is accomplished by three optical sensors:

• Incubator Top Sensor — reads the positioning slots on the outside edge of the
carousel quadrants. This sensor aligns the carousel slots with the Reader, so the
Ejector Assembly can push the card into the Reader to be read.
• Incubator Home Sensor — located behind the Carousel (not shown) and
determines the carousel home position (slot 0).
• Incubator Bottom Sensor — located at the bottom of the Carousel (not shown).
Used for proper positioning when cards are loaded from the Autoloader Station
into the Carousel.
Also included on the Carousel Incubator is an Incubator Cover with external
Thermometer Clip (not shown), an Incubator Cover Optical Sensor (which detects if
the Incubator Cover has been removed), an Antistatic Brush (used to dissipate any
static electricity buildup on the Carousel), a Reflective Card Presence Sensor (not
shown), and a Reflective Cassette Presence Sensor (not shown).
Incubator Cover Sensor
Top Optical
Position Sensor
Carousel
Carousel Quadrants
(one of four shown)
Antistatic Brush
Figure 4-21: Carousel System and Components

510779-1EN1
4.8.2.1 Incubator Temperature Control
The Incubator Heater is monitored and controlled through the use of two Remote
Precision Thermistors monitored by an A/D converter. One Thermistor is located
below the Heater and the other is located behind the Carousel Quadrants and an Air
Table (not shown). These inputs are compared to voltages produced by high-
precision resistors.
This design enables the cards to be held at an average temperature of 35.5 °C ±1 °C

(95.9 ºF ±1.8 ºF).
Air inside the Incubator is circulated by a Fan above the Heater Assembly, across the
Heater to a second Fan that pushes the heated air through a series of holes on an Air
Table, through the Carousel card slots and back up to the Fan above the Heater. The
Carousel Motor rotates the Carousel inside the Incubator.
Incubator Heater
Assembly
Figure 4-22: Incubator Heater

510779-1EN1
4.8.3 Reader System

The Reader System of the instrument performs the card positioning and optical
readings of both identification and susceptibility test cards. After the Card Ejector
pushes the card out of the Carousel onto the Reader Belt and Reader Ledge, the
reader transports the card through the Transmittance Optics. It then returns the card
to the Incubator.
TX3 Optics
TX1 Optics
Figure 4-23: Optics System and Components
The VITEK 2 Compact Reader System is comprised of an Optical/Mechanical Head

Assembly that includes a Drive Belt Motor and Pulley, a Reader Timing Belt, a spring-
loaded Roller Plate Assembly, a Cam Assembly, a 660 nm Transmittance Optical
System (TX1), and a 568 nm and 428 nm Transmittance Optical System (TX3).
The Card Ejector pushes a card out of the Carousel slot onto the Motor Drive Belt of
the Reader System. The Reader Timing Belt turns counterclockwise, transporting the
card through the Optics System and verifies the card’s presence by checking for the
card’s edge and counting the interrupts on the base of the card. Next, the Timing Belt
turns clockwise again, transporting the card through the Optics System, this time
positioning the card for well readings.
Once read, the Cam Assembly pushes the card back into the same Carousel slot for
incubation until the next reading cycle. The reader reads each card in the Carousel
once every 15 minutes. When the card is complete (a duration determined by card
type and dictated through the software), the card ejects by traveling through the
Reader System and dropping into the Waste Container.

510779-1EN1
Reader Ledge
Cam Assembly
Optics Assembly
Reader Drive Belt
Reader Head Roller

Plate
Drive Belt Motor

and Pulley
Figure 4-24: Reader System Components
4.8.3.1 Transmittance (TX) Optical System
Transmittance (TX) Optics use visible light to directly measure organism growth.
These optics are based on an initial light reading of a well before significant growth
has begun. Periodic light transmittance samplings of the same well measure
organism growth by how much light is prevented from going through the well.
The TX Optical System is an eight-channel configuration, meaning it can read eight

wells in a column (rows 1 to 8, bottom to top) for a total of 64 wells per card. The
emitter uses LEDs for the light source (at present wavelengths of 660 nm for TX1 and
568 nm and 428 nm for TX3). The detector captures the LED light using silicon
photodiodes.
Physically there are three possible mounting locations for the Transmittance Optic
Assemblies. However for proper functionality of the instrument, TX1 must be
mounted nearest to the Carousel Incubator and TX3 must be mounted nearest to the
Waste Collection Station. (The middle mounting location is unused.) The emitter and
detector housings are hinged for ease of servicing or access to the optics area.
The TX optics calibration is verified before each reading and then electronically re-
calibrated, if necessary. The system scans across the well in 16 steps and takes three
readings per step. The readings are smoothed and the peak value is chosen (the
instrument ignores any readings resulting from air bubbles).

510779-1EN1
Figure 4-25: Optical System — Cross Section
4.8.3.2 Waste Collection Station
The Waste Collection Station is located below the cassette Filler Station at the front of
the instrument. The Waste Collection Station consists of a Waste Collection Bin, a
Reflective Sensor to detect if the bin is present, and a Reflective Sensor to detect if a
card is blocking the waste chute.
Each station holds up to 60 cards, which are deposited into the bin after the reading
cycles are complete or the cards are rejected. When the bin is removed and replaced,
the control system starts a internal firmware counter that monitors the cards ejected
into the bin and alerts the operator when the bin is full.

510779-1EN1
Figure 4-26: Waste Collection Station
Upon completion of the card testing by the VITEK 2 Compact, the test cards are
ejected from the Carousel. The card then travels through the Reader System, slides
down the Waste Card Deflector (through the shoot of the Waste Shroud), and drops
into the Waste Collection Bin.
Note: The bin has a capacity of 60 test cards. However, it is recommend that the bin is
checked and emptied before it reaches capacity.
CAUTION: Ejected cards cannot be reinserted into the VITEK 2 Compact

instrument. Ensure that all card processing is complete before
commanding a card to eject.
CAUTION: Once you remove cards from the Waste Collection Station,
never reinsert them. This may cause the instrument to jam.

510779-1EN1
System Electronics System Components
4.9 System Electronics
The internal electronic architecture of the VITEK 2 Compact integrated system is a

distributive Control System comprised of two types of microprocessor-based
controller boards connected with a serial network. Instrument electrical power is
comprised of a Power Supply subsystem serving all internal power consumption
requirements.
The VITEK 2 Compact system electronics include the following primary internal
components:
• Bay Controller Board (BCB)
• Head Controller Board
• Sample Prep Node (SPN) Boards
• Vacuum Sealer SPN Board
• DC Power Supply Board
• User Interface Board
• Power Supply
Note: For the instrument schematic/wiring diagram, refer to Drawing 531900. For the
instrument jumper and test point specification, refer to Drawing 531602.
Figure 4-27: Top Level Board Diagram

510779-1EN1
System Components System Electronics
4.9.1 BCB Board

A Bay Controller Board (BCB) controls the optics, the communications to the
Workstation, and the User Interface. It also serves as the master controller for the
Sample Prep Node (SPN) boards.
The firmware for the instrument is downloaded by way of the Workstation during
periodic updates to the flash memory on the BCB. This flash memory contains all the
upper-level processing for the instrument and sequentially buffers card data and
alarm messages. The Bay Controller Board can also capture a user-invoked backup of
all the alignment settings.
The BCB is located inside the Board Mount Assembly, above the Vacuum Pump.
Figure 4-28: BCB Location (Board Mount Assembly Opened)
The BCB is a Motorola MC68332-based computer board and is responsible for the
following instrument functions:
• Controls for the Optical Systems and the associated data collection
• Non-volatile memory, holding up to 2184 card readings (60 cards for 36.4 hours)
• User Interface control
• Controls for card movement within the Reader and Incubator
• Bar Code reader
• Communications to the workstation computer
• Master control to the SPN network
Refer to Drawing 531602 for the BCB jumper configuration and BCB DC voltage test
point outputs.

510779-1EN1
4.9.2 Head Control Board

The Head Control Board (HCB) connected to the BCB serves as an analog I/O
extension board for the Reader Drive Belt Motor, Bar Code Reader, and the
Transmittance Optics. It also serves as the Analog to Digital (ADC) and Digital to
Analog Converter (DAC) for the Transmittance Optics.
DC Power
Distribution Board
Head Control
Board
Transport SPN
Board
Bar Code Reader
Board
Vacuum/Sealer
SPN Board
Figure 4-29: HCB Location
Refer to Drawing 531602 for the HCB DC voltage test point outputs.
4.9.3 Sample Prep Node Board

The Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board is a slave controller to the BCB. The SPN boards
provide the remaining instrument interface and control functions. The SPN Board is
networked to the BCB as a slave via a serial interface.
The SPN Board is based on the Motorola 68HC908AB32 microcontroller. This board
is responsible for controlling a subsystem. It receives commands from the BCB, reads
sensors, drives motors or other actuators, and transmits a response to the BCB.
During periodic updates, the flash memory of the SPN boards is updated by way of
the BCB. Each board location has an individual jumper configuration connection to
determine the specific function or operation the board performs.
The SPN board design and distributed control allow the boards to be placed close to
the systems they are controlling. By means of the jumper connection, the board is
specialized for the control of Stepper Motors, optical sensors, and general purpose
I/O. The SPN board dedicated to the vacuum and sealing functions is the only unique
SPN board in the instrument. Refer to Figure 4-29, Figure 4-30 and Figure 4-32 for
board locations.

510779-1EN1
The VITEK 2 Compact contains four SPN boards:

• The Front Panel SPN is mounted to the Front Panel Assembly, above the Filler
Chamber (see Figure 4-32).
• The Transport SPN is mounted inside the Board Mount Assembly (see
Figure 4-29 and Figure 4-30).
• The Vacuum/Sealer SPN is mounted inside the Board Mount Assembly (see
Figure 4-29 and Figure 4-30).
• The Incubator Carousel SPN is mounted on the backside of the Incubator
Assembly.
Each SPN board is responsible for the corresponding subsection.
Transport SPN Board
Vacuum/Sealer
SPN Board
Figure 4-30: SPN Boards
Refer to Drawing 531900 and Drawing 531602 for additional setup and
configuration information.
4.9.4 DC Power Distribution Board

The DC Power Distribution Board is a breakout board mounted inside the Board
Mount Assembly (see Figure 4-31). All the SPN boards receive power from this board,
along with the Bay Controller Board, the Head Controller Board, the Door Lock
Solenoids, and the LCD Assembly.

510779-1EN1
DC Power
Distribution Board
Figure 4-31: DC Power Distribution Board
Refer to Drawing 531602 for the proper voltage test point outputs.
4.9.5 User Interface Board

The User Interface Board is mounted behind the Instrument Display and serves as an
interface between the BCB, Display Assembly, and Keypad.
User Interface
Board
Front Panel
SPN Board
Figure 4-32: U/I board installed in instrument.
Refer to Drawing 531602 for the user interface DC voltage test point outputs.

510779-1EN1
4.9.6 Power Supply

The VITEK 2 Compact instrument power supply subsystem is part of the Rear Panel
Assembly. It houses and supplies the required AC and DC voltages for instrument
operation. The power supply subsystem is located in the rear of the instrument,
behind the power supply cover (Figure 4-33).
Power Supply Power Supply

65 W, +24 V 65 W, +5 V,
+12 V, -12 V
Pump Control
Power Supply
Solid-State
+12 V, 110 W
Relay (SSR)
Stepdown
Toroidal
Transformer
Power Entry Fan Assembly

Module, 6 A Power Supply
Figure 4-33: Power Supply Assembly
The Power Supply Subsystem houses the AC voltage distribution for the Vacuum
Pump and Incubator Heater. The DC voltages feed the DC Power Distribution Board.
Refer to Drawing 531900 for a wiring diagram of the Power Supply Subsystem.
The Power Supply Subsystem consists of a Power Entry Module, an AC Breakout

Board, a +24 VDC supply, +12 VDC supply, +5/+12/-12 VDC supply, a Solid-State
Relay for the Filler Pump, a Power Supply Fan Assembly, and a Toroid.
Note: The Rear Panel Assembly contains the Power Supply Subsystem, as well as two
Cabinet Fans.

510779-1EN1

510779-1EN1
CHAPTER 5: COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
About This Chapter
This chapter contains the common field repair procedures for replacing various
defective components of the VITEK 2 Compact instrument. Before performing any of
these repair procedures, be sure you have used the Troubleshooting Procedures in
Chapter 6 of this manual to properly isolate the instrument’s problems.
Chapter Contents
5.1 Important Information • 5-4

5.1.1 Repair Notes • 5-4
5.1.2 Referenced Documents • 5-5
5.2 Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal • 5-5
5.2.1 Top Panel Assembly • 5-6
5.2.1.1 Removal • 5-6
5.2.1.2 Installation • 5-6
5.2.2 Left Side Cover Assembly • 5-6
5.2.2.1 Removal • 5-6
5.2.3 Right Side Cover Assembly • 5-7
5.2.3.1 Removal • 5-7
5.2.4 Front Panel Assembly • 5-7
5.2.4.1 Removal • 5-7
5.2.5 Rear Panel Assembly • 5-8
5.2.5.1 Removal • 5-8
5.3 Power Switch Entry Module (PEM) Fuse Replacement • 5-9
5.3.1 Removal • 5-9
5.3.2 Installation • 5-10
5.4 Power Entry Module (PEM) Replacement • 5-10
5.4.1 Removal • 5-10
5.5 Power Supply Components • 5-11
5.5.1 Removal • 5-11
5.5.2.1 +5 Volt Adjustment to the +5/+12/-12 VDC Supply • 5-13
5.6 Solid-State Relay (SSR) Replacement • 5-16
5.6.1 Vacuum Pump SSR Removal • 5-16
5.6.2 Vacuum Pump SSR Installation • 5-17
5.6.3 Incubator SSR Removal • 5-17
5.6.4 Incubator SSR Installation • 5-18
5.7 Electronic Circuit Board Replacement • 5-18
5.7.1 Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement • 5-18

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement
5.7.1.1 Removal • 5-18

5.7.2 DC Power Distribution Supply Board Replacement • 5-20
5.7.2.1 Removal • 5-20
5.7.3 Head Control Assembly Board (HCB) Replacement • 5-21
5.7.3.1 Removal • 5-21
5.8 Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Replacement • 5-22
5.8.1 SPN Board Jumper Configuration • 5-22
5.8.2 SPN Board Replacement • 5-22
5.8.2.1 Removal • 5-22
5.8.3 Transport Encoder Board Replacement • 5-24
5.8.3.1 Removal • 5-24
5.9 Display Assembly Component Replacement • 5-25
5.9.1 User IF Assembly Board Removal • 5-25
5.9.2 User IF Assembly Board Installation • 5-25
5.9.3 Blue and White LCD Replacement • 5-26
5.9.3.1 Removal • 5-26
5.10 Instrument Motors • 5-26
5.10.1 Transport Linear Actuator Motor • 5-27
5.10.1.1 Removal • 5-27
5.10.2 Incubator Motor Replacement • 5-28
5.10.2.1 Removal • 5-28
5.10.3 Reader Head Motor • 5-29
5.10.3.1 Removal • 5-29
5.10.4 Autoloader Linear Actuator Motor Replacement • 5-31
5.10.4.1 Removal • 5-31
5.10.5 Ejector Motor Replacement • 5-32
5.10.5.1 Removal • 5-32
5.10.6 Cam Motor Replacement • 5-33
5.10.6.1 Removal • 5-33
5.10.7 Sealer Linear Actuator Motor Replacement • 5-34
5.10.7.1 Removal • 5-35
5.11 Instrument Sensors • 5-36
5.11.1 Optical Switch Assembly Sensor Replacement • 5-36
5.11.1.1 Removal • 5-37
5.11.2 Convergent Reflective Sensor Replacement • 5-38

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement
5.11.2.1 Removal • 5-39

5.12 Transport Assembly Replacement • 5-40
5.12.1 Removal • 5-40
5.13 Incubator Assembly • 5-41
5.13.1 Heater Incubator Fan Replacement (Top) • 5-41
5.13.1.1 Removal • 5-42
5.13.2 Incubator Fan Replacement (Bottom) • 5-42
5.13.2.1 Removal • 5-43
5.13.3 Incubator Heater Assembly Replacement • 5-43
5.13.3.1 Removal • 5-43
5.14 Transmittance Optics Replacement • 5-44
5.14.1 Removal • 5-44
5.15 Reader Head Assembly Replacement • 5-45
5.15.1 Removal • 5-46
5.16 Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement • 5-47
5.16.1 Removal • 5-47
5.17 Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly Replacement • 5-49
5.17.1 Removal • 5-49
5.18 Vacuum Pump Replacement • 5-50
5.18.1 Removal • 5-50
5.19 Three-Way Filler Valve Assembly Replacement • 5-52
5.19.1 Removal • 5-52
5.20 Rear Panel Fan Replacement • 5-53
5.20.1 Removal • 5-53
5.21 Bar Code Scanner Replacement • 5-53
5.21.1 Removal • 5-54
5.22 Sealer Assembly Replacement • 5-55
5.22.1 Removal • 5-55
5.23 Sealer Hot Wire Replacement • 5-56
5.23.1 Removal • 5-56

510779-1EN1
Important Information Component Replacement
5.1 Important Information
Ensure you read and understand the following warning information prior to
performing any maintenance or entry into the instrument.
CAUTION: Follow all procedures, cautions, and warnings in this manual

to avoid damage to the instrument, parts, or personal injury due to
impact.
CAUTION: Only authorized VITEK 2 Compact instrument service

technicians should attempt to perform any component installation or
servicing of this instrument beyond normal operational and routine
maintenance tasks. Contact bioMérieux for any additional information or
procedural direction.
WARNING
The Sealer Station contains a wire that is heated during the sealing
operation. The instrument also contains areas of elevated
temperatures in or near the incubator. Take proper precautions.
5.1.1 Repair Notes

This chapter includes the recommended procedures for component replacement.
However, alternate methods of removal and replacement can be practiced as long as
the integrity of the instrument is not compromised.
CAUTION: The VITEK 2 Compact instrument contains ESD-sensitive

devices and should therefore be handled in accordance with the
requirements of QP-09004. Instrument circuit boards are sensitive to
static electricity. Always wear a static wrist strap when handling circuit
boards or electronic components. Before removing any circuit boards or
internal components, place the main AC Power Switch in the OFF
position. After removal of any circuit board, wrap it in antistatic material
for storage or shipment. Before installing any new circuit board into the
VITEK 2 Compact instrument, check the switches and jumpers for correct
settings by referring to current documentation, or compare it to the
circuit board being removed.
Most of the VITEK 2 Compact securing screws have ND Industries Vibratite®

Formula 3 thread-locking adhesive applied. Upon two to three removals/insertions of
these screws, reapply Vibratite as follows:

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal
1. Completely cover threads in the gripping area with an approximate length of

1.5 times the diameter of screw. (Threads should be at least half full when dry.)
2. Allow Vibratite to fully dry before use (approximately 10 to 30 minutes,
depending on the part size). When dry, install fasteners immediately or store
them for use at a later time.
After replacing a component and performing any required instrument alignments,
always confirm instrument functionality by performing the Simulated Processing
Cycle found in Chapter 2 of this manual.
5.1.2 Referenced Documents
Note: Always refer to the latest drawing revision. See Table 5-1.
Document
Document
Number
531602 VITEK 2 Compact System Electronics Jumper and Test Point Specifications
532611 VITEK 2 Compact Instrument Manufacturing Commands
QP-09004 Handling Procedure — Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Devices
5.2 Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal
Removal of the cabinet panels and covers may be necessary during replacement of
components such as the Transport Motor or the Vacuum Pump. (See Figure 5-1.)

510779-1EN1
Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal Component Replacement
Top Panel
Front Panel
Side Cover
Rear Panel
Figure 5-1: Covers and Panels
5.2.1 Top Panel Assembly

Refer to Figure 5-1 for panel and cover locations.
5.2.1.1 Removal
1. Loosen the eight hex head screws securing the Top Panel Assembly to the
instrument.
2. Raise the back side of the Top Panel Assembly and then lift the assembly back,
up, and out.
5.2.1.2 Installation
1. Insert the lip of the Top Panel Assembly under the Front Panel Assembly and
then lower it in place.
2. Secure the mounting hardware.
5.2.2 Left Side Cover Assembly

5.2.2.1 Removal
1. Open the Waste Bin Door, and from the hinge area remove the two Left Panel
screws labeled SIDE.
2. Loosen the inside top screw securing the Left Panel to the Front Panel.

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal
3. Remove the five screws securing the Left Side Cover to the Rear Panel
Assembly.
4. Lift the Side Cover up and out.
1. Set the Left Side Cover in place, ensuring it is hooked onto the Front Panel
inside top screw.
2. Push down on the Side Cover to ensure proper contact with EMC gaskets and
then secure using the hardware previously removed.
3. Secure the Front Panel inside top screw.
4. Close the Waste Bin Door.
5.2.3 Right Side Cover Assembly

5.2.3.1 Removal
1. Open the Front User Access Door and remove from the hinge area the two right
panel screws labeled SIDE.
2. Remove the five screws securing the Right Side Cover to the Rear Panel
Assembly.
3. Lift the Side Cover up and out.
1. Set the Right Side Cover in place, ensuring it is hooked onto the Front Panel.
2. Push down on the Side Cover to ensure proper contact with EMC gaskets and
then secure using the hardware previously removed.
3. Close the Front User Access Door.
5.2.4 Front Panel Assembly

5.2.4.1 Removal
1. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).

2. Tag and disconnect cables from the Front Panel Assembly connecting to the
Board Mount Assembly.
3. Disconnect the vacuum tubing going to the Front Panel Assembly.

510779-1EN1
Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal Component Replacement
4. Open the Waste Bin Door and remove from the hinge area the two Left Panel
screws labeled SIDE.
5. Loosen the inside top screw securing the Left Panel to the Front Panel.
6. Open the Front User Access Door and remove the two right panel screws
labeled SIDE.
7. Open the Load/Unload Door and loosen one screw that secures the Front
Panel to the Base Pan.
8. Lift up on both the Left and Right Panels to unhook them from the Front Panel.
9. Slide the Front Panel forward to remove.
1. Install the Front Panel Assembly and hook the Left and Right Panels.
2. Secure the screw behind the Load/Unload Door, install the side panel screws,
and tighten the inside top screw securing the Left Panel to the Front Panel.
3. Connect cables and tubing.
4. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
5.2.5 Rear Panel Assembly
5.2.5.1 Removal

2. Perform the Left and Right Side Cover Assembly Removal procedures (Section
5.2.2.1 and Section 5.2.3.1, respectively).
3. Remove the two screws securing lid of the Board Mount Assembly and open
the lid to expose the boards.
4. Tag and disconnect the following cables.
• Speaker cable plugged into the BCB.
• Cable plugged into the UPS Connector PCB.
• Cable plugged into the Workstation Connector PCB.
• Power Supply Harness plugged into the Rear Panel Assembly power supply
encasing.
• AC Incubator and Vacuum Harness plugged into the Rear Panel Assembly
power supply encasing.
• Cabinet fans plugged into J23 and J17 of the Transport SPN Board
5. Open the two cable clamps located on the side of the Rear Panel Assembly
power supply encasing.
6. Ensure that the Fan Wires are separated from the Wire Bundle.
7. Remove the Rear Panel mounting hardware (see Figure 5-2):
• seven screws across the bottom

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Power Switch Entry Module (PEM) Fuse Replacement
• two screws securing the Board Mount Assembly to the Rear Panel
Assembly
• two hex-head screws and washers securing the Vacuum Mounting Plate to
the Rear Panel Assembly
Board Mount
Vacuum Mounting
Plate
Bottom Access
Figure 5-2: Rear Panel Assembly Screws
8. Lift the Rear Panel Assembly up and out.
1. Place the Rear Panel Assembly and secure it with mounting hardware.
2. Reconnect the wires to the parts as tagged.
3. Secure wire bundles by locking down the cable clamps previously opened.
4. Secure the lid of the Board Mount Assembly with hardware previously
removed.
5. Perform the Left and Right Cover Installation procedures (Section 5.2.2.2 and
Section 5.2.3.2, respectively).
5.3 Power Switch Entry Module (PEM) Fuse Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-3 for the Power Switch Fuse location.
5.3.1 Removal
1. Turn the instrument Power Switch OFF and unplug the power cord from the
instrument.
2. Note the voltage setting on the Voltage Selector. With a flat-blade screwdriver,
pry open the Fuse Drawer.

510779-1EN1
Power Entry Module (PEM) Replacement Component Replacement
3. Remove the defective fuse(s) from the Fuse Drawer.
Voltage Selector
Fuse Drawer
Power Entry
Module
Figure 5-3: Main AC Power Entry Module Fuse Replacement
5.3.2 Installation
1. Replace the fuse(s) in the Fuse Drawer. (Refer to Table 2-4, Power Entry
Module Settings for proper fuse usage.)
2. Install the Fuse Drawer.
3. Plug the power cord into the instrument Power Connection Plug.
4. Ensure the instrument is ready to be started.
5. Turn the Power Switch ON and verify system operation.
5.4 Power Entry Module (PEM) Replacement
The VITEK 2 Compact instrument PEM is located on the right side of the instrument.
Power to the instrument is supplied from a power cord connected to an optional
UPS, an optional Power Conditioner, or plugged into the lab facility’s wall outlet.
Refer to Figure 5-4 for an illustration of the PEM front.
Figure 5-5 shows the access cover that must be removed before gaining access to the
PEM for removal.
5.4.1 Removal
1. Turn the switch to the OFF position and unplug the power cord.
2. Note the voltage on the PEM, and with a flat-blade screwdriver, open the Fuse
Cover.
3. Remove the Fuse Drawer and set it aside.
4. Remove the Power Supply Cover to expose the rear of the Power Switch.
5. Tag and disconnect the wires attached to the PEM.
6. Remove the screws holding the PEM to the Rear Panel Base.

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Power Supply Components
7. Gently remove the switch from the panel.
Figure 5-4: Power Entry Module
5.4.2 Installation
1. Install the PEM and reconnect the wires as tagged.
2. Position the voltage selector as noted from the removal. (Refer to Table 2-4,
Power Entry Module Settings for proper fuse usage.)
3. Install the Fuse Drawer in the PEM.
4. Reconnect the Power Cable to the instrument’s Power Connection Plug.
5. Verify the instrument is ready to be started.
6. Turn the Power Switch ON, and verify instrument operation.
5.5 Power Supply Components
This replacement procedure is common to all the power supply components

contained inside the Rear Panel Assembly (Figure 5-6).
Note: Each component should be replaced individually.
5.5.1 Removal
1. Remove the Power Supply Cover.

510779-1EN1
Power Supply Components Component Replacement
Figure 5-5: Rear Power Supply Cover
2. Replace the non-functioning part. (See Drawing 531900 and Figure 5-6 for
individual part locations.)
3. Tag and disconnect the wires attached to the part to be replaced.
Power Supply Power Supply

65 W, +24 V, 65 W, +5 V,
+12 V, -12 V
Pump Control
Power Supply
Solid-State
+12 V, 110 W
Relay (SSR)
Stepdown
Toroidal
Transformer
Power Entry
Module, 6 A
Fan Assembly
Power Supply
Figure 5-6: Power Supply Components
5.5.2 Installation
1. Reconnect the wires to the part(s) as tagged.
2. Reinstall the Rear Power Supply Cover and tighten the fasteners.
3. Turn the Power Switch ON and verify voltages as necessary. (See Drawing
531602.)

510779-1EN1
5.5.2.1 +5 Volt Adjustment to the +5/+12/-12 VDC Supply
After replacing the +5/+12/-12 VDC Supply the +5 VDC output voltage MUST be
adjusted.
1. Turn instrument ON.

2. Remove the rear power supply cover.
3. Using a DC voltage meter place the positive lead into terminal 10 of the DC
bulkhead connector and place the negative lead into terminal 11. See
Figure 5-7.
4. Using a flat tip insulated screwdriver adjust R36 until the voltage output is 5.15
- 5.25 VDC.
5. Remove terminal leads from connector and reinstall rear power supply cover.
R36
Terminal 11
(- lead)
Terminal 10
(+ lead)
Figure 5-7: Power Supply Voltage Adjustment
Table 5-2: +12/-12 VDC Power Supply Information
Supplied by +5 / +12 / -12, 65W Power Supply
Component Information
HCB For transmittance optics
DC Power Distribution Board For +12 and -12 VDC power present LED’s

510779-1EN1
Power Supply Components Component Replacement
Table 5-3: +5 VDC Power Supply Information
Supplied by +5 / +12 / -12, 65 W Power Supply
BCB
User Interface
LCD
Bar Code Reader
HCB
DC Power Distribution Board For +5 VDC power present LED
Table 5-4: 12 VDC Power Supply Information
Supplied by 12 VDC, 110 W Power Supply
SPN - Transport
• Transport Motor Unipolar Motor / Unipolar Drive
• Cam Motor Unipolar Motor / Unipolar Drive
• Cabinet Fan (Input)
• Cabinet Fan (Exhaust)
SPN Front Panel
• Load Door Lock Solenoid
• Access Door Lock Solenoid
• Filler Door LED Indicator
• Load Door LED Indicator
SPN - Incubator
• Carousel Motor Unipolar Motor / Unipolar Drive
• Ejector Motor Unipolar Motor / Unipolar Drive
• Lower Incubator Fan
• Heater Incubator Fan
VAC/Seal Board
• Sealer Motor Unipolar Motor / Unipolar Drive
• Sealer Wire

510779-1EN1
• Proportional Valve
Power Supply Fan Wired Directly from power supply
DC Power Distribution Board For UPS interface and +12 VDC power present LED
Table 5-5: 24VDC Power Supply Information
SPN - Transport
• Autoloader Motor Unipolar Motor / Bipolar Drive
VAC/Seal Board
• Vac Soleniod 3-way valve
LCD Backlight
Reader Head Motor Unipolar Motor / Bipolar Drive located on BCB

(connection is routed through HCB)
BCB 24 V to supply Reader Head Motor
DC Power Distribution Board For 24 VDC power present LED
• Load Door Lock Solenoid 24 V only supplied at initial energizing of solenoid.

Then it maintains the locked condition using
12 VDC from the SPN
• Access Door Lock Solenoid 24 V only supplied at initial energizing of solenoid.

Then it maintains the locked condition using
12 VDC from the SPN.

510779-1EN1
Solid-State Relay (SSR) Replacement Component Replacement
Supplied by 120 VDC
Component
Incubator Heater
Vacuum Pump
+5 / +12 / -12, 65 W Power Supply
12 VDC, 110 W Power Supply
24 VDC, 65 W Power Supply
5.6 Solid-State Relay (SSR) Replacement
There are more than one Solid-State Relays installed in the instrument, one for the
Reader Incubator and one for the Vacuum Pump. This procedure is common to both
Solid-State Relays installed in the instrument.
Access to the Incubator Heater Solid-State Relay is gained by removing the Top Panel
Assembly and then by removing the Heater Cover, located on top of the Incubator
Assembly.
Access to the Vacuum Pump Solid-State Relay is from the Power Supply Cover of the
instrument. Figure 5-8 and Figure 5-9 show the Solid-State Relay locations.
5.6.1 Vacuum Pump SSR Removal

1. Remove the Power Supply cover located on the rear of the instrument.
2. Disconnect and tag all wires going to the Relay.
3. Note the Relay position (Figure 5-8 and Figure 5-9) and remove the screws
from each end of the Relay.
4. Remove the Relay and discard.

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Solid-State Relay (SSR) Replacement
Solid-State Relay
120 V, 10 A
Figure 5-8: Vacuum Pump SSR
5.6.2 Vacuum Pump SSR Installation

1. Place the SSR into position on the Rear Panel Assembly as noted during
removal.
2. Install the screws to attach the Relay to the Mounting Plate.
3. Reconnect the tagged wires to the proper points on the Relay.
4. Install the Access Panels removed for replacement of the Relay.
5. Turn the Power Switch ON and verify operation.
5.6.3 Incubator SSR Removal

1. Remove the Top Panel Assembly.
2. Remove the Heater Cover and SSR from the Incubator Assembly.
3. Disconnect and tag all wires going to the Relay.
4. Remove the Relay Cover.
5. Note the Relay position and remove the screws and washer from each end of
the Relay.
6. Remove and discard the Relay.

510779-1EN1
Electronic Circuit Board Replacement Component Replacement
Heater Cover
Solid-State Relay
Figure 5-9: Incubator Solid-State Relay Replacement
5.6.4 Incubator SSR Installation

1. Place the Relay into position on the Heater Cover as noted during removal.
2. Install screws to attach the Relay to the Heater Cover.
3. Reconnect the tagged wires to the proper points on the Relay.
4. Install the Relay.
5. Install the Top Panel Assembly.
6. Turn the Power Switch ON and verify operation.
5.7 Electronic Circuit Board Replacement
5.7.1 Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement

Refer to Figure 5-10 for BCB Circuit Board Location.
5.7.1.1 Removal

2. Open the Board Mount Assembly Door of the instrument by removing the
screws to access the Compact BCB Circuit Board.
3. Disconnect and tag all wires and cables from the BCB Circuit Board.
4. If a Hardware Key is installed in the BCB Circuit Board, remove and set it aside.

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Electronic Circuit Board Replacement
5. Note the mounting position of the BCB Circuit Board on the Mounting Plate.
6. Using a screwdriver, remove the screws holding the board in place and then
gently pry the board from the standoffs. (Be sure not to damage the board.)
BCB Board
Figure 5-10: BCB Circuit Board Replacement (Top Panel Removed)
1. Compare the replacement board with the old board for any jumper or switch
configuration and make any adjustments. Also confirm that the boot firmware
is the latest version. (Refer to Drawing 531602 and VKCXXX.)
2. Place the new BCB into the noted position from removal of the old board, and
install the screws to hold it in place.
3. Reconnect the cables and wires to the BCB Circuit Board connectors that were
previously removed.
4. Replace the Hardware Key, if applicable. (Refer to Section 2.3.4.1, BCB
Hardware Key Installation.)
6. Turn the Power Switch ON and verify the board is working. (See Drawing
531602 for voltage test point information.)
7. Wait for the User Interface to complete Initializing and the Status screen to
appear.

510779-1EN1
Electronic Circuit Board Replacement Component Replacement
CAUTION: If it takes an unusually long time for the Status screen to

appear, do not reboot the instrument until the instrument LOG files have
been reviewed. A SPN Board may be updating. If power is cycled when
SPN Boards are updating, SPN firmware will most likely be lost and a
SPN Board will need to be replaced.
8. From the diagnostic terminal, type save_alignments. (This command uploads

the current alignments from the SPN Boards to the BCB board.)
9. Download the BCB application firmware from the workstation by selecting
Start > Programs > VITEK 2 compact > Utilities > Broadcast Firmware
Update.
10. Select Yes to continue. A Progress Status Bar appears on the instrument User
Interface, and the BCB firmware update begins. Downloading the VITEK 2
Compact flash memory from the Workstation can take 90 minutes.
11. Once the download is complete and the Status screen displays on the User
Interface, type the following DML commands with instrument-specific
information. (Reference Chapter 6, Troubleshooting for more information.)
• SET_SYS_NUM
• SET_SN
• SET_PM_DATE
• SET_PROD_DATE
Note: Historical instrument statistics are not retained when a BCB is replaced.
12. From the instrument User Interface, select Main Menu > Configuration and
configure the following as desired.
• Instrument Name
• Date Format
• Schedule QC Status
• Alert Options
• Alert Volumes
• Display Options
5.7.2 DC Power Distribution Supply Board Replacement

Refer to Figure 5-11 for the location of the DC Power Distribution Supply Board.
5.7.2.1 Removal

2. To access the DC Power Distribution Board, open the Board Mount Assembly
door of the instrument by removing the securing screws.
3. Disconnect and tag all cables from the DC Power Distribution Board.

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Electronic Circuit Board Replacement
DC Power
Distribution Board
Head Control Board
Transport SPN
Bar Code Reader

Board
Vacuum Sealer
Board
Figure 5-11: Board Locations
1. Place the new DC Power Distribution Supply Board into position and install the
screws.
2. Reconnect the cables.
3. Secure the Board Mount Assembly.
4. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation Procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
5. Turn the Power Switch ON and verify the board is working. (See Drawing
531602 for voltage test point information.)
5.7.3 Head Control Assembly Board (HCB) Replacement

Refer to Figure 5-11 for the location of the HCB Circuit Board.
5.7.3.1 Removal

2. To access the HCB, open the Board Mount Assembly Door of the instrument by
removing the securing screws.
3. Tag and disconnect the cables attached to the HCB board.
4. Disconnect the HCB/Barcode Interconnect Assembly from the HCB and set it
aside.
5. Note the mounting position of the board.

510779-1EN1
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Replacement Component Replacement
7. Remove the HCB.
1. Place the HCB into the proper position noted from the removal of the old
board, and gently push the board on the standoffs and install the screws.
2. Connect the cables to the HCB as tagged from the removal of the old board.
3. Connect the previously set-aside HCB/Barcode Connector Assembly to J6 of
the HCB.
4. Reinstall the screws securing the Board Mount Assembly Door.
6. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation. (Refer to Drawing
531602 for any voltage readings and test point information.)
5.8 Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Replacement
The instrument houses four SPN Boards. The Transport, Front Panel, Incubator, and
Vacuum/Sealer SPN Board.
This procedure is common to all the SPN Boards located inside the instrument. All
SPN Boards are interchangeable except the Vacuum/Sealer Assembly Board. The
instrument is designed for easy access. This allows for easy serviceability and
replacement of SPN Boards.
5.8.1 SPN Board Jumper Configuration

Each SPN Board is designed to perform the operational process of the system to
which it is assigned. To accomplish the configuration of the particular system that the
SPN Board is to control, the jumper configuration must be set to allow the SPN Board
to function to that system (Refer to Drawing 531602).
5.8.2 SPN Board Replacement

Refer to Drawing 531602 for the jumper configuration for the SPN Board that you are
replacing. Figure 5-12 shows a typical SPN Board.
5.8.2.1 Removal
1. Remove the instrument panels to expose the SPN Board to be replaced.

2. Tag and disconnect the cables attached to the SPN Board.
3. Note the mounting position and jumper configuration of the board.

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Replacement
4. Using a screwdriver, remove the screws holding the board in place. Then, if
necessary, gently pry the board from the standoffs. (Be sure not to damage the
board.)
SPN Board
Figure 5-12: SPN Board Replacement
1. Configure the jumper for the system that the replacement SPN Board is to
control. Refer to the old board or Drawing 531602 for the correct jumper
configuration.
2. Place the SPN Board into the proper position noted from the removal of the old
board and install the board.
IMPORTANT: If installing the Carousel SPN Board, ensure the ground wires are reconnected.
3. Connect the cables to the SPN Board as tagged from the removal of the old
board.
4. Install the instrument panels that were previously removed.
6. Wait for the User Interface to complete Initializing and the Status screen to
appear.
CAUTION: If it takes an unusually long time for the Status screen to

appear, do not reboot the instrument until the instrument LOG files have
been reviewed! A SPN Board may be updating. If power is cycled when a
SPN Board updates, SPN firmware will most likely be lost and a SPN
Board will need to be replaced.

510779-1EN1
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Replacement Component Replacement
7. From the Diagnostic prompt of the corresponding VITEK 2 Compact, type

restore_alignments and press ENTER. (This command downloads the saved
alignments from the BCB Board to the SPN Boards.)
8. Verify alignments. If the Vacuum/Sealer Assembly SPN was replaced, perform
both the Sealer and Vacuum Filler alignment/calibration procedures. (See
Drawing 532600).
5.8.3 Transport Encoder Board Replacement

The Encoder Board is part of the Transport Assembly located near the center of the
instrument.
5.8.3.1 Removal
1. Perform the Front Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.4.1).

2. Tag and disconnect the cables attached to the Encoder Board.
3. Remove the two screws anchoring the board to the Transport Assembly and
gently pry the board off of the standoffs.
Encoder Board
Figure 5-13: Transport Assembly Encoder Board
1. Place the board into position and replace the screws.

2. Connect the cables to the board as tagged from the removal of the old board.
3. Perform the Front Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.4.2).
4. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation.
5. Perform the Transport System alignment procedures. (See Drawing 532600.)

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Display Assembly Component Replacement
5.9 Display Assembly Component Replacement
The display assembly consists of a User Interface Assembly Board, a Display Mount
Bracket, a blue and white LCD, and a display to UIF cable.
Refer to Figure 5-14 for the location of the display assembly.
5.9.1 User IF Assembly Board Removal

2. Tag and disconnect the cables plugged into the board.
CAUTION: Sufficiently tag Ribbon Cables for when you reconnect the
ribbons to the instrument. Improperly placed Ribbon Cables prevent the
keypad from functioning properly.
3. Remove the screws holding the board in place and then gently pry the board
from the standoffs. (Be sure not to damage the board.)
Display Mount
Bracket
User I/F
Assembly Board
Front Panel SPN

Board Bracket
Figure 5-14: Display Assembly Component Replacement
5.9.2 User IF Assembly Board Installation

1. Place the board into position, snap the board into place, and install the screws.
2. Connect the Ribbon Cable and Backlight Cable. Ensure the Ribbon Cable is
properly oriented.

510779-1EN1
Instrument Motors Component Replacement
5.9.3 Blue and White LCD Replacement
5.9.3.1 Removal

2. Tag and disconnect the cables going to the LCD.
3. Remove the two screws securing the Front Panel SPN Board Bracket. (This is to
allow access to the lower screws securing the Display Mount Bracket.)
4. Remove the two top screws securing the Display Mount Bracket and loosen the
two bottom screws.
5. Orient the Display Mount Bracket so the LCD is facing outward.
6. Remove the screws securing the LCD, and then remove the LCD.
1. Mount the LCD to the Display Mount Bracket using the screws previously
removed.
2. Reinstall the Display Mount Bracket onto the Front Panel Assembly using the
screws previously removed.
3. Secure the Front Panel SPN Board Bracket using the screws previously
removed.
5.10 Instrument Motors
All of the transporting motors are similar in manufacture, but the biggest difference is
what they are driving. Some motors drive belts, while others are gear- or screw-
driven.
The following motors can be found in the VITEK 2 Compact:

• Transport Linear Actuator Motor
• Incubator Motor
• Reader Head Motor
• Autoloader Linear Actuator Motor
• Ejector Motor
• Cam Motor
• Sealer Linear Actuator Motor
Refer to Drawing 531900 for motor pin and wiring connections.

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Instrument Motors
Figure 5-15: Sample Drive Motor
5.10.1 Transport Linear Actuator Motor

Refer to Figure 5-16 for an example of the Transport Motor.
Transport Motor
Figure 5-16: Transport Assembly (Shown with Rear Panel Removed))
5.10.1.1 Removal
1. Perform the Rear Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.5.1).

2. Tag and disconnect the Transport Motor Wire going to the Transport SPN
Board, located in the Board Mount Assembly.
3. Remove the two screws securing the Motor/Guide Rod Mount, noting ground
wires.
4. Pull the Motor away from the Transport Assembly and then unscrew the Motor
from the Floating Drive Nut.
5. Remove the four hex head screws securing the Motor to the Rod Mount.

510779-1EN1
1. Secure the Transport Motor to the Motor/Guide Rod Mount.

2. Place the Motor into the Transport Assembly and thread the drive screw
through the Floating Drive Nut.
3. Secure the Motor/Guide Rod Mount and Ground Wires.
4. Connect the Transport Motor to the Transport SPN Board as tagged.
5. Perform the Rear Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.5.2).
7. After turning the instrument ON, perform the Transport System alignment
procedures. (See Drawing 532600.)
5.10.2 Incubator Motor Replacement

Refer to Figure 5-17 for an example of the Incubator Motor.
5.10.2.1 Removal

2. Perform the Right Side Cover Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.3.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the motor wires attached to the Carousel SPN Board.
4. Remove the two screws mounting the Motor Mount Bracket and Motor to the
Incubator Assembly. Remove the Bracket and Motor.
5. Loosen and remove the four screws and washers mounting the Stepper Motor
to the Motor Mount Bracket. (Note the Motor orientation to the Bracket.)
6. Measure and note the distance of the Drive Pulley mounted on the Motor Drive
Shaft.
7. Loosen the Pulley set screws and remove from the Motor Shaft.
8. Discard the Motor.

510779-1EN1
Ejector Motor
Incubator Motor
Figure 5-17: Incubator Motor
1. Install the Motor Pulley on the Motor Shaft to the distance measured during
removal of the Motor. Place the set screws of the Motor Pulley over flat spots of
the Shaft and tighten the set screws securely.
2. Mount the replacement Stepper Motor to the Motor Mount Bracket in the same
orientation as removed.
3. Mount the Motor Mount Bracket and Motor to the Incubator Assembly.
4. Reconnect the wires to the Carousel SPN Board as tagged.
5. Perform the Right Side Cover Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.3.2).
8. After turning the instrument ON, perform the carousel alignment procedures.
(Refer to Drawing 532600.)
5.10.3 Reader Head Motor

Refer to Figure 5-18 for an example of the Reader Head Motor.
5.10.3.1 Removal

510779-1EN1
2. Tag and disconnect the Reader Head Motor wires attached to the Head
Controller Board, located in the Board Mount Assembly.
3. Open the Optics and press on the belt where the Optics sit. Make a note of the
belt tension. Also turn the Motor Shaft and Pulley of the Reader Head Motor
and make a note of the force required to turn it by hand. (When re-assembling,
you need to adjust the belt accordingly.)
4. Loosen the Reader Motor Bracket and push it upward, adding slack to the belt.
5. Loosen and remove the four mounting screws, securing the Stepper Motor to
the Reader Motor Bracket.
6. Remove the Motor. (Note the Motor orientation of motor bracket.)
7. Measure and note the distance of the Drive Pulley mounted on the Motor Drive
Shaft.
8. Loosen the Pulley set screws and remove them from the Motor Shaft.
Reader Head Motor

shown from the front
with Pulley and Belt
attached to Motor.
Figure 5-18: Reader Head Motor
1. Install the Motor Pulley on the Motor Shaft to the distance measured during
Motor removal. Place the set screws of the Motor Pulley over the flat spots of
the Shaft, and tighten the set screws securely.
2. Install the Motor in the same orientation to the Bracket as removed. Place the
Belt around the Motor Pulley.
3. Position and tighten the Motor so the belt tension is the same as noted during
removal. (Open the Optics to check the belt tension and rotate the Motor Shaft
and Pulley, checking the force required.)
4. Reconnect the wires to the HCB as tagged.

510779-1EN1
5. Secure the Board Mount Assembly and perform the Top Panel Assembly
Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
6. Turn the instrument ON and verify the system operation.
5.10.4 Autoloader Linear Actuator Motor Replacement

Refer to Figure 5-19 for the location of the Autoloader Motor.
5.10.4.1 Removal

2. Remove the hardware securing the Sealer Assembly to the Base Pan to make
the Autoloader more accessible.
3. Tag and disconnect the Motor and Sensor Wires attached to the Transport SPN
Board, located in the Board Mount Assembly.
4. Remove the two screws securing the Assembly to the Center Mount.
5. Slide the Autoloader Assembly from the Mounting Plate.
6. Loosen and remove the four screws attaching the Linear Actuator Motor to the
Actuator Mounting Bracket.
7. Remove the Linear Actuator Motor from the Extension Arm and then discard
the motor.
Motor
Extension
Arm
Autoloader
Autoloader
Mounting
Plate
Figure 5-19: Autoloader Motor
1. Thread the Linear Actuator Motor into the Extension Arm.

2. Secure the Motor to the Actuator Mounting Bracket.

510779-1EN1
3. Insert the Autoloader Assembly into the Mounting Plate and secure it to the
Center Mount using the hardware previously removed.
4. Connect the Motor and Sensor Wires to the Transport SPN Board as previously
noted.
6. Turn the power switch ON.
7. Verify that the Motor is operating properly and perform the alignment
procedure. (See Drawing 532600.)
5.10.5 Ejector Motor Replacement

Refer to Figure 5-20 for the location of the Ejector Motor.
5.10.5.1 Removal
1. Perform the Top Panel and Right Side Cover Assembly Removal procedures
(Section 5.2.1.1 and Section 5.2.3.1).
2. Tag and disconnect the motor wires attached to the Incubator SPN Board.
3. Move the Ejector Blade by hand to expose the four pan-head screws securing
the Motor.
4. Loosen and remove the four mounting screws attaching the Motor to the back
of the Ejector Rack. (Note the Motor orientation to the Ejector Rack.)
5. Measure and note the distance of the Tray Drive Gear mounted on the Motor
Drive Shaft.
6. Loosen the hex screw and remove the gear from the Motor Shaft.
Ejector
Motor
Figure 5-20: Card Ejector Motor

510779-1EN1
1. Position the Tray Drive Gear on the Motor Shaft to the distance measured
during removal. Tighten hex screw securely.
2. Mount the replacement Motor onto the Ejector Rack in the same orientation
noted during removal.
3. When tightening the Motor mounting screws, make sure the Drive Gear
engages the Rack enough to remove backlash, but not tight enough to produce
binding.
4. Connect the Motor wires to the Incubator SPN Board as noted during removal.
5. Perform the Top Panel Assembly and the Right Side Cover Assembly
Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2 and Section 5.2.3.2, respectively).
7. Verify that the motor is operating properly and confirm carousel top alignment.
(See Drawing 532600.)
5.10.6 Cam Motor Replacement

Refer to Figure 5-21 for the location of the Cam Motor.
5.10.6.1 Removal

2. Tag and disconnect the Motor wires attached to the Transport SPN Board,
located in the Board Mount Assembly.
3. While supporting the Cam Motor on the inside of the Reader Head, loosen and
remove the Cam Motor Assembly’s two mounting screws.
4. Carefully lift the Cam Motor Assembly from the Reader Head.
5. Loosen and remove the four mounting screws attaching the Motor to the Motor
Mount Bracket. (Note the Motor orientation to the Bracket.)
6. Measure and note the distance of the Tray Drive Gear mounted on the Motor
Drive Shaft.
7. Loosen the set screws and remove the gear from the Motor Shaft.

510779-1EN1
Cam
Cam
Motor
Figure 5-21: Cam Motor (Top View)
1. Position the Tray Drive Gear on the Motor Shaft to the distance measured
during removal of the Motor. Place the set screws of the Motor Pulley over the
flat spots of the Shaft and tighten the set screws securely.
2. Mount the replacement Motor onto the Motor Mount Bracket in the same
orientation as noted during removal.
3. When tightening the Motor Mounting Screws, make sure the Drive Gear
engages the Rack enough to remove backlash, but not tight enough to produce
binding.
4. Carefully place the Cam Motor Assembly inside the Reader Head, and while
supporting the Cam Motor, reinstall the assembly using the two mounting
screws.
5. Connect the motor wires to the Transport SPN Board as previously noted.
8. Verify that the motor is operating properly and perform the Cam alignment
procedure. (See Drawing 532600.)
5.10.7 Sealer Linear Actuator Motor Replacement

Refer to Figure 5-22 for the location of the Sealer Linear Actuator Motor Assembly.
Note: The Sealer Linear Actuator Motor and Sealer Drive Pin may become damaged
during the removal process. Ensure availability of replacement parts before
continuing.

510779-1EN1
Sealer Linear
Actuator Motor
Figure 5-22: Sealer Linear Actuator Motor
5.10.7.1 Removal
1. Perform the Sealer Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.22.1).

2. Remove the six screws securing the Motor Mount/Shaft Assembly to the Sealer
Frame Housing.
3. Remove the two screws securing the Motor to the Motor Mount.
4. Remove the Sealer Motor Shaft Cover from the Sealer Motor Assembly.
5. Attach locking pliers onto the Motor Drive Screw, and then unscrew the Motor
from the Sealer Drive Pin.
6. Inspect to determine if the threads of the Motor Drive Screw broke off in the
Sealer Drive Pin.
7. If the Motor was functional prior to removal, inspect the Motor Drive Screw for
breakage or irregularities due to the force applied.
1. If required, replace the Sealer Drive Pin and Sealer Motor.

2. Apply a drop of cylinder bond adhesive (Loctite® RC 609) to the threads of the
Motor Assembly.
3. Screw the Motor into the Sealer Drive Pin and then secure the Motor to the
Motor Mount.
4. Secure the Motor Mount to the Sealer Frame Housing.
5. Perform the Sealer Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.22.2).

510779-1EN1
Instrument Sensors Component Replacement
5.11 Instrument Sensors
There are two types of sensors inside the instrument. One type is an Optical Switch
Sensor and the other is a Convergent Reflective Sensor.
The Sensor Replacement procedures are similar with the exception of the location of
the device. Refer to Table 5-7 and Table 5-8 for the locations of the Sensors. The
specific location of the Sensors requires the technician to open or remove panels to
access the area they serve. Most sensors are positioned in close proximity to the
component they monitor or control.
The VITEK 2 Compact instrument has the following sensors.

• Optical Switch Assembly Sensors
• Convergent Reflective Sensors
5.11.1 Optical Switch Assembly Sensor Replacement

All Optical Sensors operate identically. The only change is in the physical construction
of the specific sensing arrangement. All have mounting screws and bases along with
wiring for board connection (see Figure 5-23 for an example).
See Drawing 531900 for the Optical Switch Assembly wiring configuration.
Table 5-7: Optical Switch Sensors
Part
Name Location Function
Number
532173-1 WIDE OPTICAL Behind Filler Chamber Filler Door detection

SWITCH ASSY Door
Behind Front Access Front Access Door

Door detection
Behind Top Access Top Access Door

Door detection
530154-1 WIDE OPTICAL Behind Waste Waste Container Door

SWITCH ASSY Container Door detection
Behind Load/Unload Load/Unload Door

Door detection
Load/Unload Door lock Load/Unload Door lock

detection
Front Access Door lock Front Access Door lock

detection
Carousel Assembly Carousel Index Bottom
532162-1 SEALER HOME Sealer Assembly Sealer Home Sensor

SWITCH ASSY
532163-1 AUTOLOADER Assembly Home

HOME SENSOR

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Instrument Sensors
Table 5-7: Optical Switch Sensors
Part
Number
532157-1 OPTICAL Carousel Assembly (3) Carousel Cover

SWITCH ASSY, Carousel Index Top
CAROUSEL Carousel Home
532158-1 OPTICAL Ejector Assembly Ejector home

SWITCH ASSY,
EJECTOR
530119-1 OPTICAL Cam Assembly Cam home

SWITCH ASSY
Optical Sensor
Figure 5-23: Optical Switch Assembly Sensor
5.11.1.1 Removal
1. Open the Door or remove an Access Panel of the instrument to access the
Optical Sensor to be replaced.
2. Disconnect and tag the cable from the SPN Board to where the Optical Sensor
attaches. Note the mounting position.
3. Remove the screw(s) holding the Sensor and remove the Sensor from the
instrument.
1. Place the new Optical Switch Assembly Sensor into position and install the
mounting screws.

510779-1EN1
Instrument Sensors Component Replacement
2. Reconnect the cable to the SPN Board connectors that was previously
removed.
3. Install or close any access doors or covers previously removed.
4. Turn the instrument ON and verify that the Sensor operates properly. (See
Drawing 531900 for wiring information.)
5. Verify alignments. (See Drawing 532600.)
5.11.2 Convergent Reflective Sensor Replacement

The Convergent Reflective Sensors only sense in a limited area. (See Figure 5-24.)
They all operate identically, with the only difference being the physical positioning or
mounting. (See Figure 5-25 for an example.) Drawing 531900 shows the Reflective
Sensors wiring configuration.
Figure 5-24: Convergence Reflective Sensor

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Instrument Sensors
Table 5-8: Convergent Reflective Sensors
Part
Number
158008-1 SENSOR, TOP SENSING Transport Assembly (rear) Transport Home Sensor
REFLECTIVE
158009-1 SENSOR, REFLECTIVE, Waste Collection Bin (side) Waste Bin detection
5 VOLTS Waste Collection Bin (top) Waste Chute card jam
detection
158008-2 SENSOR, FRONT Incubator Assembly (front) Cassette Presence Sensor

SENSING REFLECTIVE Card Presence Sensor
Convergent
Reflective Sensors
Figure 5-25: Convergent Reflective Sensors
5.11.2.1 Removal
1. Open the door or remove the Access Panel of the instrument to access the
Optical Sensor.
2. Remove the mounting hardware from the Reflective Sensor.
3. Disconnect the Reflective Sensor Harness from the Reflective Sensor.
1. Connect the Reflective Sensor Harness to the Reflective Sensor.

2. Secure the Reflective Sensor using hardware previously removed.
3. Install or close any access doors or panels previously removed.
4. Turn the instrument ON and verify that the Sensor operates properly. (See
Drawing 531900 for wiring information.)

510779-1EN1
Transport Assembly Replacement Component Replacement
5. Verify alignments (See Drawing 532600.)
5.12 Transport Assembly Replacement
The Transport Assembly can be replaced as one unit or at the component level.
Replacement of the Transport Encoder Board, Transport Linear Actuator Motor, and
Transport Home Reflective Sensor were described earlier in this chapter.
Transport
Assembly
Figure 5-26: Transport Replacement (Front)
5.12.1 Removal
2. Tag and disconnect the external wires going to the Transport Assembly.
3. Remove the four screws that mount the Assembly to the Base Pan.

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Incubator Assembly
Two of Four
Mounting Screws
Figure 5-27: Transport Replacement (shown from rear of instrument)
5.12.2 Installation
1. Place the Transport Assembly into the instrument and replace the screws
holding it to the Base Pan.
2. Reconnect the wires to the Transport Assembly.
4. Turn the power switch ON and verify the correct operation of the Transport
Assembly.
5. After turning the instrument ON, perform Transport System alignments. (See
Drawing 532600.)
5.13 Incubator Assembly
Replacement procedures for the following Incubator Assembly component parts are
covered in this section:
• Two Incubator Fans
• Heater Assembly
Replacement of the incubator SPN Board, carousel Optical Sensors, and Carousel
Motor have been described earlier in this chapter. Removal of the Carousel
Quadrants can be found in the VITEK 2 Compact Instrument User Manual under the
section Cleaning the Carousel.
5.13.1 Heater Incubator Fan Replacement (Top)

Refer to Figure 5-28 for the location of the Heater Incubator Fan.

510779-1EN1
Incubator Assembly Component Replacement
Heater Incubator
Fan Assembly
Heater Assembly
Bottom Incubator
Fan Assembly
Figure 5-28: Incubator Assembly with Back Cover Removed
5.13.1.1 Removal

2. Remove the Heater Cover from the top of the Incubator Assembly and set it to
the side.
3. Tag and disconnect the Heater Incubator Fan Wire from the Incubator SPN
Board. (Note the fan position and airflow direction.)
4. Remove the two screws securing the Fan Assembly and remove the Fan.
1. Install the Fan as noted during removal. (Airflow should be directed down into
the Heater Assembly.)
2. Connect the Fan to the Incubator SPN Board.
3. Reinstall the Heater Cover onto the top of the Incubator Assembly.
5. Turn the instrument ON and confirm that the fan is working.
5.13.2 Incubator Fan Replacement (Bottom)

Refer to Figure 5-28 for the location of the Bottom Incubator Fan.

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Incubator Assembly
5.13.2.1 Removal
1. Perform the Top Panel Assembly and Right Side Cover Assembly Removal
procedures (Section 5.2.1.1 and Section 5.2.3.1, respectively).
2. Remove the Incubator Back Cover from the Incubator Assembly.
3. Label and disconnect the Fan Wires from the Incubator SPN Board. (Note the
Fan position and airflow direction.)
4. Remove the screws, attaching the Bottom Fan to the Incubator Assembly.
1. Place the Fan into the Incubator Housing as noted during removal. (Airflow
should be from outside the cabinet to inside the Carousel.)
2. Install the screws to attach the Bottom Fan to the Incubator Assembly.
3. Connect the Fan Cable to the SPN Board.
4. Perform the Top Panel Assembly and Right Side Cover Assembly Installation
procedure (Section 5.2.1.2 and Section 5.2.3.2).
5. Turn the instrument ON and verify that the Fan is working.
5.13.3 Incubator Heater Assembly Replacement

Refer to Figure 5-28 for the location of the Heater Assembly.
5.13.3.1 Removal
1. Perform the Top Panel Assembly and the Right Side Cover Assembly Removal
procedures (Section 5.2.1.1 and Section 5.2.3.1).
2. Remove the Incubator Back Cover from the Incubator Assembly.
3. Tag and disconnect the Wiring Cables of the Heater Assembly.
4. Remove the Heater Assembly by pulling it up and out.
1. Insert the Heater Assembly into the Incubator Assembly.

2. Connect the Wiring Cables as previously tagged.
3. Install the Incubator Back Cover.
4. Perform the Top Panel Assembly and the Right Side Cover Assembly
Installation procedures (Section 5.2.1.2 and Section 5.2.3.2).
5. Turn the instrument ON and verify that the Heater Assembly is working.

510779-1EN1
Transmittance Optics Replacement Component Replacement
5.14 Transmittance Optics Replacement
Installed in the instrument are Transmittance Optics 1 (TX1) and Transmittance

Optics 3 (TX3). The Transmittance Optics Replacement procedure is written to allow
you to make the required replacements as efficiently as possible.
Reader Ledge
Optics Module
Figure 5-29: Optics Modules
5.14.1 Removal
2. Tag and disconnect the Ribbon Cables that are plugged into both sides of the
optics. While supporting each of the Optics Modules, one at a time push the
Clamp Lever on the top of each Optics Module. Gently allow the Optics to
hinge down.
3. Press on the belt where the Optics sit and make a mental note of the belt
tension. Also turn the Motor Shaft and Pulley of the Reader Head Motor and
make a mental note of the force required to turn it by hand. (When re-
assembling, adjust the belt accordingly.)
4. Unscrew the screws from the Reader Ledge and remove the Ledge from the
Reader Frame.
5. Note the placement of the Timing Belt on the Reader Head. Loosen the Reader
Motor Bracket and push it upward, adding slack to the belt.
6. Partially remove the belt by pulling it over the upper right corner of the Roller
Plate Assembly.
7. With the optics open, maneuver the belt around and down so it comes off of
the TX optics (The belt will still be threaded around the Reader Head.)
8. Close each of the Optics Modules until the Clamp Lever locks in place.
9. Remove the two mounting screws attaching the Optics Module(s) you need to
replace from the Reader Head assembly.

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Reader Head Assembly Replacement
10. Carefully slide the Optics Module(s) from the Reader.

11. Set the Optics Module(s) aside.
TX3 Optics
TX1 Optics
Figure 5-30: Optics Modules (Top View)
5.14.2 Installation
1. Carefully install the Optics Module(s) into the Reader Head Assembly.
2. Install the mounting screws, attaching the Optics Module(s) to the frame.
3. While supporting each of the Optics Modules, one at a time push the Clamp
Lever on the top of each of the Optics Modules. Gently allow the Optics to
hinge down.
4. Move the Belt up and over the Optics and reposition the Belt around the Roller
Plate Assembly.
5. Install the Reader Ledge onto the frame and tighten the three screws.
6. Carefully close each of the Optics Modules until the Clamp Lever locks in place,
ensuring that the Drive Belt is in the proper position on the Rollers.
7. Position and tighten the Motor Bracket so the belt tension is the same as noted
during removal. (Open the optics to check the Belt tension and rotate the
Motor Shaft and Pulley, checking the force required.)
8. Reconnect the flat cables to the Optics.
10. Turn the power switch ON and verify the system operation.
5.15 Reader Head Assembly Replacement
The Reader Head Assembly consists of the Reader Head Plate, Roller Plate, the Cam
Assembly and Reader Motor. It does not include the Reader Ledge, Reader Belt, or
Transmittance Optics.

510779-1EN1
Reader Head Assembly Replacement Component Replacement
Reader Head
Assembly
Figure 5-31: Reader Head Assembly
5.15.1 Removal
1. Perform the Transmittance Optics Removal procedure (Section 5.14.1).
2. Tag and disconnect the Cam and Reader Motor Wires.
3. Remove the two ground straps attached to the Reader Head Assembly.
4. Loosen the three screws securing the Reader/Bar Code Mount to the Center
Mount.
5. Remove the two screws securing the Reader Head Plate to the Reader/Bar
Code Mount and the two screws securing the Reader Head Plate to the
Incubator Assembly.
6. Gently lift the Reader Assembly from the instrument and set it on a flat surface.
7. Note the placement of the Belt on the Reader Head.
8. Remove the Reader Motor Bracket screws and set the Motor Assembly aside.
9. Remove the Reader Belt.
5.15.2 Installation
1. Install the Reader Belt, Reader Motor, and Bracket onto the Reader Head
Assembly as previously noted.
2. Place the Reader Head into the instrument and loosely install the securing
hardware.
3. Tighten the two screws securing the Reader Head to the Incubator.

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement
4. Tighten the two screws securing the Reader Head to the Reader/Bar Code
Mount.
5. Tighten the three screws securing the Reader/Bar Code Mount to the Center
Mount.
6. Connect the two ground straps to the Reader Head Assembly.
7. Connect all wires disconnected during removal.
8. Perform the Transmittance Optics Installation procedure (Section 5.14.2).
9. Turn the power switch ON, perform the Carousel Top Alignment and Cam
Alignment procedures.
5.16 Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt replacement can be accomplished without

removing the Reader Assembly from the instrument. Refer to Figure 5-32and Figure
5-33 for the location of the Reader Head Drive Belt.
Figure 5-32: Reader Head Drive Belt (Partially Disassembled)
5.16.1 Removal
2. Tag and disconnect the Ribbon Cable plugged into the Optics.
Lever on the top of each of the Optics Modules and gently allow the Optics to
hinge down.
4. Press on the Belt where the Optics sit and make a mental note of the Belt

510779-1EN1
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement Component Replacement
assembling, adjust the belt accordingly.)
5. Note the placement of the Belt on the Reader Head. Loosen and remove the
Reader Motor Bracket screws, slip the belt off of the Drive Pulley, and set the
Motor Assembly aside.
6. Partially remove the belt by pulling it over the upper right corner of the Roller
Plate Assembly. Then with the Transmittance Optics opened, maneuver the
belt around and down so it comes off of the Optics.
7. Remove the Belt from the Reader Head Assembly.
Drive Belt
Figure 5-33: Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt
5.16.2 Installation
1. Install the Belt on the Card Reader Assembly as noted during removal.
2. Move the Belt up and over the Optics, and reposition the belt around the Roller
Plate Assembly.
3. Carefully close each of the Optics Modules until the Clamp Lever locks in place.
4. Reconnect the Ribbon Cable.
5. Install the Motor and Mount Bracket Assembly with the mounting screws. Do
not tighten the screws.
6. Place the Drive Belt over the Drive Motor Pulley. Slide the Motor and Mount to
remove the slack in the Drive Belt.
7. Position and tighten the Motor so the Belt tension is the same as noted during
removal. (Open the optics to check the Belt tension and rotate the Motor Shaft

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly Replacement

9. Turn the power switch ON and verify instrument operation.
5.17 Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly Replacement
Roller Plate Replacement can be accomplished without removing the Reader

Assembly from the instrument. Bad bearings create the need for replacing the Roller
Plate Assembly. Refer to Figure 5-34 for location of the Roller Plate.
5.17.1 Removal
Lever on the top of each Optics Module and gently allow the Optics to hinge
down.
2. Press on the Belt where the Optics sit and make a mental note of the Belt
assembling, adjust the Belt accordingly.)
3. Close each of the Optics Modules until the Clamp Levers lock in place.
4. Note the placement of the Timing Belt on the Reader Head. Loosen and
remove the screws securing the Reader Motor Bracket to the Roller Plate
Assembly.
5. Remove the eight screws securing the Roller Plate Assembly.
6. Remove the three springs.
7. Carefully remove the Roller Plate Assembly from the Reader Head.
8. Remove the seven Card Rollers and the four Reader Belt Rollers from the Plate
Assembly.
9. Discard the Plate Assembly.
Roller Plate
Assembly
Figure 5-34: Reader Head Roller Plate

510779-1EN1
Vacuum Pump Replacement Component Replacement
5.17.2 Installation
1. Using thread-lock adhesive (Vibratite) on the shoulder screws, install the seven
Card Rollers along the top of the Plate Assembly, and the four Reader Belt
Rollers on the remaining bearings.
2. Insert a 1.5 mm hex Allen wrench fully through each Roller and tighten
securely.
3. Carefully install the Plate Assembly while routing the Timing Belt as previously
noted around the Rollers.
4. Install the eight screws, but do not tighten.
5. Install the three springs.
6. Tighten the eight screws, securing the Plate Assembly to the Linear Way Rails.
Lever on the top of each Optics Module. Gently allow the Optics to hinge down.
8. Carefully close each Optics Module until the Clamp Lever locks into place,
ensuring that the Drive Belt is in the proper position on the Rollers.
9. Install the Reader Motor Bracket to the Roller Plate Assembly and place the
Timing Belt around the Pulley.
10. Position and tighten the Motor so the Belt tension is the same as noted during
removal. (Open the optics to check the Belt tension and rotate the Motor Shaft
5.18 Vacuum Pump Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-35 for the location of the Vacuum Pump.
5.18.1 Removal
2. Remove the two hex-head screws securing the Board Mount Assembly to the
top of the Vacuum Mounting Plate.
3. Remove the two grounding straps from the Board Mount Assembly.
4. Tag and disconnect the following cables and tubing from the Board Mount
Assembly, so it can temporarily be placed on top of the Incubator Assembly.
• cables going into TX Optics
• cable going into the Bar Code Reader
• three-way Filler Valve Assembly wires going to the Vacuum Sealer PCB
• large and small tubing going into the Filler Chamber
• cable clamps securing the wire bundles
• any other cables preventing the Board Mount Assembly from being moved

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Vacuum Pump Replacement
5. Carefully set the Board Mount Assembly on top of the Incubator Assembly,
ensuring cable clearance.
6. Remove the four screws securing the Vacuum Mounting Plate to the Base Pan.
7. Disconnect the cable from the Vacuum Pump Assembly.
8. Disconnect tubing from the Vacuum Pump Assembly to the Three-Way Filler
Valve Assembly.
9. Turn the Vacuum Pump and Valve Assembly upside down, and remove the
four pump mounting screws.
10. Place the Vacuum Pump and Valve Assembly right side up and remove the
three screws mounting the black Shipping Restrainer to the Vacuum Mounting
Plate.
11. Once the pump is removed, visually check the four Vacuum Pump Bubble
Mounts (i.e. shock mounts) for wear or cracking.
Shipping
Restrainer
Three-Way Filler
Valve Assembly
Vacuum
Mounting Plate
Vacuum Pump
Assembly
Vacuum Pump
Bubble Mounts
Figure 5-35: Vacuum Pump (Shown with Cabinet Removed)
5.18.2 Installation
1. Replace the Vacuum Pump Bubble Mounts as required.
2. Position the Pump inside the Vacuum Mounting Plate and loosely install the
black Shipping Restrainer.
3. Turn the Vacuum Pump and Valve Assembly upside down.
4. Support the Pump while installing the pump mounting hardware.
5. Support the Pump and place the Vacuum Pump and Valve Assembly right side
up.
6. Connect the tubing from the Three-Way Valve Assembly to the Pump.

510779-1EN1
Three-Way Filler Valve Assembly Replacement Component Replacement
7. Place the Vacuum Pump and Valve Assembly onto the Base Pan, connect the
Pump Cable, and then secure. Ensure that the Ground and Cable Clamp are
mounted to the Vacuum Mounting Plate.
8. Reconnect all cables, wires, and tubing to parts as tagged.
9. Reconnect the two Grounding Straps to the Board Mount Assembly.
11. Turn the power switch ON, perform Vacuum Filler Alignment/Calibration
procedures. (See Drawing 532600.)
5.19 Three-Way Filler Valve Assembly Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-35 for the location of the Three-Way Filler Valve Assembly.
5.19.1 Removal
2. Tag and disconnect the Three-Way Filler Valve Assembly wires connected to the
Vacuum Sealer PCB.
3. Remove the two screws securing the Three-Way Filler Valve Assembly to the
underside of the Vacuum Mounting Plate.
4. Note the orientation of the filler valve assembly and the filler tubing.
5. Disconnect the tubing from the filler valve assemblies filter and the 3-way valve
assembly.
5.19.2 Installation
1. Connect the tubing to the filler valve assembly as previously noted during
removal.
2. Mount the Three-Way Filler Valve Assembly to the underside of the Vacuum
Mounting Plate.
3. Connect the Three-Way Filler Valve Assembly to the Vacuum Sealer PCB as
tagged.
6. After turning the VITEK 2 Compact instrument ON, perform the Vacuum Filler
Alignment procedures. (See Drawing 532600.)
7. Perform the Proportional Valve Calibration (INIT_PROP_VALVE) and the
Vacuum Filler Leak Test (FILLER_LEAK_TEST). See Drawing 532600.

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Rear Panel Fan Replacement
5.20 Rear Panel Fan Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-36 for the location of the instrument Cabinet Fans.
5.20.1 Removal
2. Tag and disconnect the Wiring Connectors going to the Fan.
3. Note the Fan position and airflow direction.
4. If removing the Air Intake Fan, remove the Fan Filter/Grill Assembly.
5. Remove the mounting hardware and Wire Finger Guards from the Fan.
Intake Fan
Exhaust Fan
Figure 5-36: Instrument Cabinet Fans
5.20.2 Installation
1. Install the Fans and Wire Finger Guard as noted during removal. Ensure the
airflow is in the proper direction (Figure 5-36).
2. Connect Wiring Connectors to Fans.
4. Turn the power switch ON and verify the system operation.
5.21 Bar Code Scanner Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-37 for the Bar Code Scanner location.

510779-1EN1
Bar Code Scanner Replacement Component Replacement
5.21.1 Removal
2. Note the position of the Scanner on the Bracket and then remove the Scanner.
3. Disconnect the cable going to the Bar Code Scanner.
4. Remove the two screws securing the Bar Code Scanner Mounting Bracket to
the Reader Head.
5. Remove the four screws securing the Bar Code Scanner to the Bar Code
Scanner Mounting Bracket.
6. Set the Scanner aside for return, repair, or replacement.
Figure 5-37: Bar Code Scanner
5.21.2 Installation
1. Secure the Bar Code Scanner to the Bar Code Scanner Mounting Bracket.
2. Secure the Bar Code Scanner Mounting Bracket to the Reader Head.
3. Connect the cable going to the Bar Code Scanner.
5. After turning the VITEK 2 Compact instrument ON, perform the Transport
Alignment procedures. (See Drawing 532600.)

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Sealer Assembly Replacement
5.22 Sealer Assembly Replacement
WARNING
The Sealer Station contains a wire that is heated during the sealing
operation. The instrument also contains areas of elevated
temperatures in or near the incubator. Take proper precautions.
The Sealer Assembly can be replaced as one unit or at the component level.
Replacement of the Sealer Motor and Sealer Home Optical Sensor were described
earlier in this chapter. Replacement of the Sealer Hot Wire is described in Section
5.23.
Refer to Figure 5-38 and Figure 5-39 for the Sealer Replacement.
5.22.1 Removal
2. Remove the mounting hardware securing the Sealer Assembly to the Base Pan.
3. Disconnect and tag the Sealer Wire Assembly wiring and remove the assembly
from the instrument.
Note: When disconnecting the red Sealer Hot Wire cable from the Vacuum Sealer Board,
use a 3 mm flat-tip screwdriver and press down through the top opening of the
Spring Terminal Block.
Sealer Assembly
Figure 5-38: Sealer Assembly

510779-1EN1
Sealer Hot Wire Replacement Component Replacement
5.22.2 Installation
1. Place the Sealer Assembly into the instrument.
2. Install the mounting screws to the Sealer Assembly.
3. Connect the wiring as noted during removal.
4. Turn the power switch ON and check the instrument operation.
5. Perform the alignment/calibration procedures for the Sealer Assembly (see
Drawing 532600).
5.23 Sealer Hot Wire Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-39 for the Sealer Hot Wire Replacement.
5.23.1 Removal
1. Perform the Sealer Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.22.1).
2. Remove the Hot Wire Rotating Shield from the Sealer Frame Housing. Take
caution not to lose nylon washers that are placed between the Rotating Shield
and Housing.
3. Note the orientation of the Sealer Hot Wire and then remove it from the Sealer
Connector Assembly.
Sealer Hot Wire
Figure 5-39: Sealer Hot Wire
5.23.2 Installation
1. Install the Sealer Hot Wire as noted during removal.

510779-1EN1
Component Replacement Sealer Hot Wire Replacement
2. Install the Hot Wire Rotating Shield to the Sealer Frame Housing, ensuring that
the nylon washers are placed between the two parts.
3. Perform the Sealer Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.22.2).
4. Turn the power switch ON and check the instrument operation.
5. Perform the alignment/calibration procedures for the Sealer Assembly. (See
Drawing 532600.)

510779-1EN1
Sealer Hot Wire Replacement Component Replacement

510779-1EN1
CHAPTER 6: TROUBLESHOOTING
About This Chapter
This chapter contains information to aid in diagnosing problems with the VITEK 2
Compact instrument. Refer to the VITEK 2 Compact Instrument User Manual for
additional information.
WARNING
POTENTIAL BIOHAZARDOUS MATERIAL. Instrument surfaces and
contaminated test kit components are potentially biohazardous and
should be handled according to good laboratory practices. Observe
universal precautions when operating the instrument and when
performing maintenance or troubleshooting.
Chapter Contents
6.1 Instrument Diagnostics Using DML • 6-6

6.1.1 Accessing DML Using HyperTerminal • 6-6
6.1.2 Accessing DML Using Physical Connection from Instrument to Alternate
PC • 6-7
6.1.3 Accessing DML using Remote-Anything • 6-7
6.1.3.1 Setup Guidelines for Remote-Anything Master • 6-8
6.1.3.2 Setup Guidelines for Microsoft® Windows Dial-Up Connection • 6-8
6.1.3.3 Enable Host Computer Modem for Remote Access • 6-8
6.1.3.4 Start Up Microsoft Windows Dial-Up Connection to VITEK 2 Compact
Host Computer • 6-10
6.1.3.5 Start Up Remote-Anything Master for Connection to VITEK 2
Compact Host Computer • 6-10
6.1.4 Opening Instrument Diagnostic Window • 6-11
6.1.5 Disable Modem of Host Computer and Log Out • 6-11
6.1.6 Disconnect Microsoft Windows Dial-Up Connection • 6-11
6.1.7 Searching for DML Commands and Variables • 6-11
6.1.8 System Commands • 6-14
6.1.8.1 HELP • 6-14
6.1.8.2 VER • 6-14
6.1.8.3 COLD • 6-15
6.1.8.4 INST_DATA • 6-15
6.1.8.5 SERIAL_NUMBER • 6-15
6.1.8.6 SET_INST_NAME • 6-15
6.1.8.7 SET_SN • 6-15
6.1.8.8 SET_SYS_NUM • 6-15
6.1.8.9 TIME • 6-16
6.1.8.10 SET_TIME • 6-16
6.1.8.11 CHECK_HDW_KEY • 6-16
6.1.8.12 STAT • 6-16
6.1.8.13 HEALTH • 6-17

510779-1EN1
Troubleshooting
6.1.8.14 DUMP_EQM • 6-17

6.1.8.15 CLEAR_EQM • 6-17
6.1.8.16 SHIP_CLEAR • 6-17
6.1.8.17 TELL_ERROR • 6-18
6.1.8.18 DUMP_COMPSTAT • 6-18
6.1.8.19 DUMP_STATS • 6-19
6.1.8.20 CLEAR_COMP_STATS • 6-20
6.1.8.21 DUMP_ALL • 6-20
6.1.8.22 NODE_STATUS • 6-20
6.1.8.23 CLEAR_PM_STATS • 6-21
6.1.8.24 SET_PM_DATE • 6-21
6.1.8.25 GET_SYS_LANG • 6-21
6.1.8.26 SET_SYS_LANG • 6-21
6.1.8.27 SPN_SENSORS • 6-22
6.1.8.28 JUMPER • 6-22
6.1.8.29 WELLMAPS • 6-22
6.1.9 Cabinet Commands • 6-23
6.1.9.1 SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO • 6-23
6.1.9.2 SET_CAB_FAN_SPEED • 6-24
6.1.9.3 GUI_ALERTS_DEFAULT • 6-24
6.1.9.4 DEC_SCREEN_CONTRAST • 6-25
6.1.9.5 INC_SCREEN_CONTRAST • 6-25
6.1.10 Vacuum/Filler Commands • 6-25
6.1.10.1 FILLER_STATUS • 6-25
6.1.10.2 DUMP_FILLER • 6-25
6.1.10.3 INIT_VAC (Alignment mode only) • 6-26
6.1.10.4 CYCLE_VAC (Alignment mode only) • 6-26
6.1.10.5 FILLER_LEAK_TEST (Alignment mode only) • 6-26
6.1.10.6 DIAG_FILLER (Alignment mode only) • 6-27
6.1.11 Transport Commands • 6-27
6.1.11.1 INIT_TRANS (Alignment mode only) • 6-27
6.1.11.2 TEST_TRANSPORT (Alignment mode only) • 6-27
6.1.11.3 TRANS_TO_DOOR (Alignment mode only) • 6-27
6.1.11.4 TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE (Alignment mode only) • 6-28
6.1.11.5 TRANS_TO_LOADER (Alignment mode only) • 6-28
6.1.11.6 TRANS_TO_SEALER (Alignment mode only) • 6-29
6.1.11.7 TRANS_TO_CASS (Alignment mode only) • 6-29
6.1.11.8 DUMP_CO • 6-29
6.1.11.9 DUMP_VCD • 6-30
6.1.12 Bar Code Commands • 6-30
6.1.12.1 TRIGGER_BARCODE • 6-30
6.1.13 Sealer Commands • 6-31
6.1.13.1 INIT_SEALER (Alignment mode only) • 6-31
6.1.13.2 EXTEND_SEALER (Alignment mode only) • 6-31
6.1.13.3 RETRACT_SEALER (Alignment mode only) • 6-31
6.1.13.4 SEALER_ON (Alignment mode only) • 6-31
6.1.13.5 SEALER_OFF (Alignment mode only) • 6-31
6.1.13.6 TEST_SEALER (Alignment mode only) • 6-31
6.1.14 Autoloader Commands • 6-32
6.1.14.1 INIT_AL (Alignment mode only) • 6-32
6.1.14.2 CYCLE_AL (Alignment mode only) • 6-32
6.1.15 Incubator/Carousel Commands • 6-33

510779-1EN1
Troubleshooting
6.1.15.1 INCUBATOR_STATUS • 6-33

6.1.15.2 INIT_CARO (Alignment mode only) • 6-33
6.1.15.3 HOME_CARO (Alignment mode only) • 6-33
6.1.15.4 SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO • 6-34
6.1.15.5 INIT_HEATER • 6-34
6.1.15.6 DUMP_CM • 6-34
6.1.15.7 CARO_STATUS • 6-36
6.1.15.8 PAUSE_CARO • 6-37
6.1.15.9 RESUME_CARO • 6-37
6.1.15.10 CLEAR_CARO_SLOT • 6-37
6.1.15.11 CLEAR_CARO • 6-38
6.1.15.12 LOAD • 6-38
6.1.15.13 UNLOAD_CARD • 6-38
6.1.15.14 UNLOAD • 6-38
6.1.15.15 CARO • 6-39
6.1.15.16 CT (Alignment mode only) • 6-39
6.1.15.17 CARO_BOTTOM • 6-39
6.1.15.18 CB (Alignment mode only) • 6-39
6.1.15.19 CARO_QUAD • 6-39
6.1.15.20 CHECK_CARO_SLOP (Alignment mode only) • 6-40
6.1.15.21 INIT_EJECTOR (Alignment mode only) • 6-40
6.1.15.22 CYCLE_EJECTOR (Alignment mode only) • 6-40
6.1.16 Reader/Transmittance/CAM Commands • 6-41
6.1.16.1 CAL_TX • 6-41
6.1.16.2 CHECK_CAL_TX • 6-41
6.1.16.3 SCAN_TX_SENSORS (Alignment mode only) • 6-41
6.1.16.4 READ_TX • 6-42
6.1.16.5 BURN_TX_SENSORS (Alignment mode only) • 6-42
6.1.16.6 TEST_BELT • 6-43
6.1.16.7 INIT_CAM (Alignment mode only) • 6-43
6.1.16.8 CYCLE_CAM (Alignment mode only) • 6-43
6.1.17 UPS Commands • 6-43
6.1.17.1 UPS_STATUS • 6-43
6.1.17.2 CHECK_UPS_BATTERY • 6-44
6.1.17.3 CHECK_UPS_POWER • 6-44
6.1.18 Host Communication • 6-44
6.1.18.1 COM_STATUS • 6-44
6.1.18.2 CTDB_STATUS • 6-44
6.1.18.3 DUART_STATUS • 6-46
6.1.19 Flash Log Commands • 6-46
6.1.19.1 LOGS • 6-46
6.1.19.2 LOGS_AND_HISTORY • 6-46
6.1.19.3 TAIL_LOG • 6-46
6.1.19.4 BOOT_LOG • 6-47
6.1.19.5 GREP_LOG • 6-47
6.1.19.6 HISTORY • 6-47
6.1.19.7 TAIL_HISTORY • 6-48
6.1.19.8 GREP_HISTORY • 6-48
6.1.19.9 ERASE_LOG_HISTORY • 6-48
6.1.20 Diagnostic Commands • 6-48
6.1.20.1 CLS • 6-48
6.1.20.2 LOOP • 6-48
6.1.20.3 LOOPK • 6-49

510779-1EN1
Troubleshooting
6.1.20.4 PR • 6-49
6.1.20.5 $LINES_PER_SCREEN • 6-49
6.1.21 Motor Commands • 6-49
6.1.21.1 MN • 6-49
6.1.21.2 CHECKHOME • 6-50
6.1.21.3 HOME • 6-50
6.1.21.4 IN • 6-50
6.1.21.5 OUT • 6-50
6.1.21.6 MOTOR_ON • 6-50
6.1.21.7 MOTOR_OFF • 6-50
6.1.21.8 MOV • 6-51
6.1.21.9 DISABLE • 6-51
6.1.22 Firmware Commands • 6-51
6.1.22.1 REQUEST_FIRMWARE • 6-51
6.1.23 Macro Commands • 6-51
6.1.23.1 MAC • 6-51
6.1.23.2 ED • 6-52
6.1.23.3 SETMAC • 6-52
6.1.23.4 DELMAC • 6-52
6.1.23.5 COPYMAC • 6-52
6.1.23.6 CLEAR_ALL_MACROS • 6-52
6.1.23.7 REFRESHMAC • 6-52
6.1.23.8 ALIGNMENT • 6-52
6.1.23.9 ALIGN_ON • 6-53
6.1.23.10 ALIGN_OFF • 6-53
6.1.23.11 ALIGN_TRANS_CASSETTE • 6-53
6.1.23.12 ALIGN_SEALER • 6-53
6.1.23.13 CAL_SEALER • 6-53
6.1.23.14 ALIGN_CARO_TOP • 6-54
6.1.23.15 ALIGN_CARO_BOTTOM • 6-54
6.1.23.16 ALIGN_CAM • 6-54
6.1.23.17 SET_AL_HEIGHT • 6-54
6.1.23.18 ALIGN_AL • 6-54
6.1.23.19 CALIBRATE_FILLER • 6-54
6.1.23.20 INIT_PROP_VALVE • 6-54
6.1.23.21 SAVE_ALIGNMENTS • 6-55
6.1.23.22 RESTORE_ALIGNMENTS • 6-55
6.1.23.23 SHOW_ALIGNMENTS • 6-55
6.1.23.24 DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT • 6-55
6.1.24 BURN-IN Commands • 6-56
6.1.24.1 ENABLE_BURN • 6-57
6.1.24.2 START_BURN • 6-57
6.1.24.3 SET_BURN_DEFAULTS • 6-57
6.1.24.4 BURN_STATS • 6-57
6.1.24.5 CHANGE_CYCLE_COUNTS • 6-57
6.1.24.6 CHANGE_ERROR_THRESHOLD • 6-57
6.1.24.7 CHANGE_GROUP_COUNTS • 6-57
6.1.24.8 CLEAR_ERROR • 6-58
6.1.24.9 DISABLE_BURN • 6-58
6.1.24.10 DUMP_STATS • 6-58
6.1.24.11 MONITOR_BURN • 6-58
6.1.24.12 PAUSE_BURN • 6-58
6.1.24.13 QUICK_LOAD • 6-58

510779-1EN1
Troubleshooting
6.2 General Troubleshooting • 6-59

6.3 Windows XP Event Logs • 6-63
6.3.1 VITEK 2 Compact System Logs • 6-64

510779-1EN1
Instrument Diagnostics Using DML Troubleshooting
6.1 Instrument Diagnostics Using DML
The Development Macro Language (DML) is a tool for determining, diagnosing, and
maintaining the VITEK 2 Compact instrument. The DML can be accessed by the
following three methods:
• Using HyperTerminal on the Host Personal Computer (Host PC).
• Using a terminal emulator program on an alternate PC or laptop, and connecting
to the instrument with a physical connection.
• Connecting to the Host PC using Remote-Anything (a remote communication
software package), and then using the HyperTerminal program on the Host PC.
WARNING
It is imperative that the operator accessing the Development Macro
Language (DML) type all commands with preexisting knowledge of
the result. Erroneously executing commands could have a detrimental
effect on the operation of the VITEK 2 Compact instrument. Any
person accessing the DML should first have the proper training
through bioMérieux, Inc.
6.1.1 Accessing DML Using HyperTerminal

1. Log in to the host PC using one of the two login options outlined below:
• Log in to the admin account. Below is the factory default password for
Admin. This password may have been changed.
User Name: Admin
Password: bmx_admin
• Log in to the bmx_admin account. The password of this login is a

proprietary algorithm and changes daily. To determine the appropriate
password, refer to the GCS Portal.
User Name: bmx_admin
Password: password of the day (proprietary algorithm)
2. Double-click the corresponding HyperTerminal icon located on the host PC

desktop (for example, Instrument 1 Diagnostic or Instrument 2 Diagnostic).
If a HyperTerminal icon is not available for the instrument, configure COM6 for
the diagnostic port of Instrument 1 Diagnostic and COM8 for the diagnostic
port of Instrument 2 Diagnostic, using the following settings:
• Terminal: VT100
• Baud Rate: 9600
• Parity: None
• Data Bits: 8
• Stop Bits: 1
• Flow Control: none

510779-1EN1
Troubleshooting Instrument Diagnostics Using DML
3. From the Communication window, press Spacebar Backspace or Esc Esc to

display the instrument Prompt >.
4. At the instrument Prompt > type LOGIN XXXXXX (where XXXXXX = login for the
corresponding login group) and press Enter.
Refer to Drawing 532612 for information. Logins are case-sensitive. A line
describing the login group confirms a successful login.
6.1.2 Accessing DML Using Physical Connection from Instrument to

Alternate PC
1. Connect the Data/Diagnostic Reader Cable to the VITEK 2 Compact instrument.
2. Connect the end of the cable marked DIAGNOSTIC to a COM port available on
the alternate PC.
3. Open HyperTerminal or an equivalent communications software package on
the PC.
4. Configure the communication package COM port as follows:
• Terminal: VT100
• Baud Rate: 9600
• Parity: None
• Data Bits: 8
• Stop Bits: 1
• Flow Control: none
5. From the Communication window, press Spacebar Backspace or Esc Esc to
display the instrument Prompt >.
corresponding login group), and press Enter.
6.1.3 Accessing DML using Remote-Anything

There are two ways to remotely communicate to the instrument:
• Modem Communication
• Network Communication
This section only defines remote communication via a modem connection. The
VITEK 2 Compact Host PC Modem must be connected to a standard analog phone
line.
Remote-Anything Slave (Slave.exe) is installed on the VITEK 2 Compact Host PC.

510779-1EN1
6.1.3.1 Setup Guidelines for Remote-Anything Master
Remote-Anything Master (Master.exe) is required on the Service Engineer’s PC to

establish remote communication.
1. Ensure that a master license has been obtained.

2. Place a copy of Master.exe in a folder created on the Service Engineer’s PC. You
may also create a shortcut icon on the PC’s desktop.
3. Import a master license by following the instructions provided by the Remote-
Anything distributor.
4. Set up Remote-Anything Master with the following Slave Computer settings:
Slave IP Address: 10.0.0.101 (Alternate 10.0.0.102)
Password: bmx_remote
Port: 4000
Note: You can save these settings by clicking the EDIT button and placing these settings in
the RA Address Book.
6.1.3.2 Setup Guidelines for Microsoft® Windows Dial-Up Connection
Microsoft Windows Dial-Up Connection must be set up on the Service Engineer’s PC

to establish a modem connection. This is done for each VITEK 2 Compact system at
the time of installation by the bioMérieux Service Engineer.
1. Depending on your setup, from the Windows taskbar click Start > Programs >
Accessories > Communications > Remote-Access OR Network and Dial-up
Connections OR Network Connections.
2. Create a new connection using the available link.
3. Follow the prompts to set up a dial-up connection.
4. When complete, click Finish.
6.1.3.3 Enable Host Computer Modem for Remote Access
By default, the VITEK 2 Compact Host Computer Modem displays. For service to gain
access remotely to the computer, the user/customer with Administrative privileges
needs to enable the modem. If the user/customer does not have Administrative
privileges, they can log in to the host computer as bmx_admin.

1. Once the user/customer is logged in as Administrator, from the Windows

taskbar, select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Network Connections >
Incoming Connections.

510779-1EN1
Figure 6-1: Network Connections
2. Click the check box next to the Lucent® Win Modem device.
3. Click OK. This enables the modem to receive calls.
Figure 6-2: Modem Enable

510779-1EN1
WARNING
If you leave the modem enabled to receive incoming calls, there is a
security risk. In addition, the VITEK 2 Compact system software cannot
use the modem for BCI connections. When remote access is no longer
necessary, the modem MUST be disabled. Follow this section’s
procedure, but remove the check mark.
6.1.3.4 Start Up Microsoft Windows Dial-Up Connection to VITEK 2 Compact

Host Computer
1. From the Service Engineer’s PC Windows taskbar click Start > Programs >
Accessories > Communications > Remote-Access OR Network and Dial-up
Connections OR Network Connections.
2. Select the appropriate dial-up connection.
3. Log in to the host PC using one of the two login options outlined below:
• Log in to the Admin account. (Below is the factory default password for
Admin. This password may have been changed).
User Name: Admin
Password: bmx_admin
• Log in to the bmx_admin account. (The password of this login is a

proprietary algorithm and changes daily. To determine the appropriate
password, refer to the GCS Portal).
4. Click Dial.
5. Once connected, a Communication Status icon appears in the Windows
taskbar.
6.1.3.5 Start Up Remote-Anything Master for Connection to VITEK 2 Compact

Host Computer
1. Run Master.exe from the Service Engineer’s PC by selecting the Remote-

Anything icon from the Windows taskbar.
2. Select the appropriate Slave Computer.
3. Click the Monitor button at the bottom of Remote-Anything Master to “View
the screen of the selected slave PC”.
4. The VITEK 2 Compact host computer screen displays. This is the GUI screen
that the user/customer sees. It can be accessed by both the user and the
Service Engineer (remotely).

510779-1EN1
6.1.4 Opening Instrument Diagnostic Window

1. Double-click the corresponding HyperTerminal icon located on the host PC
desktop (for example, Instrument 1 Diagnostic or Instrument 2 Diagnostic).
2. From the Communication window, press the Spacebar Backspace or Esc Esc
to display the instrument Prompt >.
corresponding login group), and press Enter.
Note: To discontinue use of the Instrument Diagnostics, close the HyperTerminal window.
6.1.5 Disable Modem of Host Computer and Log Out
IMPORTANT: For security purposes, once a remote connection is no longer necessary, the
Host Computer Modem must be disabled prior to disconnect.
1. When VITEK 2 Compact troubleshooting is complete, from the Windows

taskbar select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Network Connections >
Incoming Connections.
2. Uncheck the check-box next to the Lucent Win Modem device. The checkmark
should be removed from the box.
3. Click OK. This disables the modem so it will not receive incoming calls.
4. Close any windows that were opened during troubleshooting.
5. Log out of the host PC by selecting Start > Log Off Admin and follow the
prompts to log out.
6.1.6 Disconnect Microsoft Windows Dial-Up Connection

1. Click the Communication Status icon from the Windows taskbar.
2. A Status window appears.
3. Click the Disconnect button.
4. Close Remote-Anything Master.
6.1.7 Searching for DML Commands and Variables

There are over 500 commands and variables in the VITEK 2 Compact DML. To
simplify searching for a specific command, use the MANUAL, MANUAL_EXPORT,
WORDS, CMDS, and/or VARS tools (detailed below).
Note: There is no case sensitivity to DML commands or variables, so they can be typed in
either upper or lower case.
There are various ways to access Help or retrieve a listing of commands.

510779-1EN1
Note: Entering a question mark after a command or variable displays Help text for that
command.
• Type MANUAL and MANUAL_EXPORT to display the entire list of commands and
variables in DML and its associated Help text. The MANUAL_EXPORT format is
designed to be exported to a document table. Because the text output is
extremely long and scrolls off the screen, bioMérieux recommends enabling a
capture file prior to executing either command. It takes several minutes for the
command to complete. An instrument prompt reappears when the command is
complete. Stop the capture file and review as necessary.
• Type WORDS and press ENTER to list commands and variables in the DML
display. Prior to scrolling off the screen, the message “Press any key to
continue” displays. To escape from the scroll, press q or Esc key. To scroll non-
stop, press the g key.
• Type WORDS PATTERN and press ENTER to search for a particular command.
PATTERN indicates the text of the command being searched. For example, typing
WORDS FILLER and pressing ENTER displays all DML commands and variables
containing FILLER (Figure 6-3).
Figure 6-3: Words Example One
Words are categorized into 22 groups. To search for commands and variables in a
specific group, type WORDS followed by a space, a comma ( , ) and the group.
For example, typing the WORDS ,TRANS and pressing Enter lists all commands in
the Transmittance and Transport groups (Figure 6-4).
Note: The entire group name does not have to be entered.
Table 6-1: DML Groups

Keywords Exec
Reader Head Motor Network
HCB Host Communication
Diagnostics Transport
DevTest BarCodeScanner
LDM Driver GUI
BurnIN Filler
Alignment SystemMonitor
Duart SPN
Carousel LDM Log History DataBase:
Transmittance LDM Card Test DataBase:

510779-1EN1
Figure 6-4: Words Example Two
To search for commands and variables beginning with a specific text pattern, type
WORDS followed by a space, a caret (^), and a PATTERN. For example, typing
WORDS ^TRANS and pressing Enter lists all the commands and variables
beginning with TRANS (Figure 6-5).
Figure 6-5: Words Example Three
• Type CMDS or VARS. These commands are used the same way as WORDS. If
CMDS is typed, the entire list of commands scrolls on the screen. If VARS is
typed, the entire list of variables scroll on the screen.
• Find a specific command by typing CMDS PATTERN.
• Find a specific variable by typing VARS PATTERN.
• Enter a question mark (?) after a command or variable to display a short
definition or Help text of that command. For example, by typing FILLER_STATUS
? and pressing ENTER a short description of the command FILLER_STATUS
displays. (Figure 6-6.)
Figure 6-6: Words Example Four

510779-1EN1
6.1.8 System Commands
6.1.8.1 HELP
Format: HELP
Definition: HELP displays information on how to obtain help about DML commands.
6.1.8.2 VER
Format: VER
Definition: VER displays the current instrument firmware versions. Figure 6-7 shows
an example of the VER command.
Example:
Figure 6-7: VER Example Output
• Application version (BCB) – The Bay Controller Board firmware version.

• BOOT version – The boot firmware version written on the EPROM chip located
on the Bay Controller Board.
• SPN Nodes – The firmware versions of all the SPN boards.
• Instrument System Number – The system number associated with the
instrument (This first needs to be manually entered by the DML command
SET_SYS_NUM).
• Instrument Serial Number – The instrument serial number assigned by
Instrument Manufacturing.
• 1-Wire Touch Serial Number – The unique BCB serial number. This is only
identified in DML. It is not written on the BCB PCB.

510779-1EN1
6.1.8.3 COLD
Format: COLD
Definition: COLD performs a reset (reboot) of the instrument. This command is

prioritized by the data manager. If there are any processes that have a higher priority,
it performs those tasks first before rebooting.
6.1.8.4 INST_DATA
Format: INST_DATA
Definition: INST_DATA displays the instrument system number, instrument serial

number, electronic BCB serial number, instrument production date, and the field
service maintenance date.
6.1.8.5 SERIAL_NUMBER
Format: SERIAL_NUMBER
Definition: SERIAL_NUMBER displays the unique electronic BCB serial number. This
serial number is also displayed with the VER command. This number is only
identified in DML. It is NOT physically written on the BCB PCB.
6.1.8.6 SET_INST_NAME
Format: SET_INST_NAME <name>
Definition: SET_INST_NAME sets the instrument name in NV Ram. The instrument

name can also be set from the Instrument User Interface from the Main Menu by
selecting Configuration > Instrument Name.
6.1.8.7 SET_SN
Format: SET_SN <numeric>
Definition: SET_SN sets the instrument number in non-volatile memory. This string
can be from 0 to 640000.
Example: SET_SN 1100
6.1.8.8 SET_SYS_NUM
Format: SET_SYS_NUM <alpha/numeric string>
Definition: SET_SYS_NUM sets the system number in non-volatile memory. This

string can be up to 20 characters long.
Example: SET_SYS_NUM 50000

510779-1EN1
6.1.8.9 TIME
Format: TIME
Description: TIME displays the current Time (Real Time Clock [RTC]).
6.1.8.10 SET_TIME
Format: SET_TIME (year:YYYY) (month:MM) (day:DD) (hour:HH) (minute:MM)
Description: SET_TIME sets the date and time of the instrument. The date and time of
the instrument is referenced from the connecting Host PC. Therefore, do not use this
command if the instrument is connected to a Host PC.
Example: SET_TIME 2004 09 20 15 30 (20 September 2004 at 3:30 p.m.)
6.1.8.11 CHECK_HDW_KEY
Format: CHECK_HDW_KEY
Description: CHECK_HDW_KEY checks for the presence of a Hardware Key located

on the Bay Controller Board and displays the status. If no Hardware Key is present,
the instrument reads 30 cards in the carousel at one time. If a Hardware Key is
installed, the instrument reads 60 cards in the carousel at one time.
6.1.8.12 STAT
Format: STAT
Description: STAT displays general system status information.

510779-1EN1
6.1.8.13 HEALTH
Format: HEALTH
Description: HEALTH displays system health information. Anything out of the ordinary
is displayed by this command. This includes any warning icons displayed on the User
Interface, if the fans are in an error condition (see SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO for more
information), or if the instrument was in an error state. This command does not show
if the instrument requires an intervention or if an alarm with warning recently
occurred. It is not unusual for this command to show things such as “Duart (A0)
Errors” or “Duart (A1) Errors”. These errors are not critical and are just general
information with respect to communications.
Example:
Figure 6-8: HEALTH Example Output
6.1.8.14 DUMP_EQM
Format: DUMP_EQM
Description: DUMP_EQM displays the entire contents of historical warnings and

instrument errors. EQM is an abbreviation for Error Queue Manager
Alias Macro: messages
6.1.8.15 CLEAR_EQM
Format: CLEAR_EQM
Description: CLEAR_EQM clears the entire contents of the historical warnings and
errors of the instrument. EQM is an abbreviation for Error Queue Manager.
6.1.8.16 SHIP_CLEAR
Format: SHIP_CLEAR
Description: SHIP_CLEAR prepares the instrument for shipment by clearing the Error
Queue Manager (EQM) and the Card Test DataBase (CTDB).

510779-1EN1
6.1.8.17 TELL_ERROR
Format: TELL_ERROR (detail code)
Description: TELL_ERROR displays information about the given error code. The
instrument error code is displayed in the following manner: (user code) : (sub-
system) . (component) . (detail code). Only type the detail code after the
TELL_ERROR command. For more information about Compact error codes, refer to
Drawing 532610 and the VITEK 2 Compact Instrument User Manual.
6.1.8.18 DUMP_COMPSTAT
Format: DUMP_COMPSTAT
Description: DUMP_COMPSTAT displays any section/component in an error state

along with a description of the error.
Example:
Figure 6-9: DUMP_COMPSTAT Example Output

510779-1EN1
6.1.8.19 DUMP_STATS
Format: DUMP_STATS <component name>
Description: DUMP_STATS displays the burn-in and normal stats for the given
component. The following example includes a list of all the instrument component
names used with this command. These names can be shortened and are not case-
sensitive.
Example:
Figure 6-10: Listing of DUMP_STAT Component Names
Figure 6-11: DUMP_STAT Example Output (Using Carousel)

510779-1EN1
6.1.8.20 CLEAR_COMP_STATS
Format: CLEAR_COMP_STATS <component name or ALL>
Description: CLEAR_COMP_STATS clears the components stats for the given

component or for ALL components. Use this command when the corresponding
component is replaced.
6.1.8.21 DUMP_ALL
Format: DUMP_ALL
Description: DUMP_ALL calls a string of commands that could assist with instrument
troubleshooting. Because of its size, it is best to enable a screen capture prior to
executing this command.
6.1.8.22 NODE_STATUS
Format: NODE_STATUS
Description: NODE_STATUS displays all SPN Board node numbers, functions, and
status.
Example:
Figure 6-12: NODE_STATUS Example Output
• # (number): Indicates all of the possible jumper configurations of the SPN

boards. Only 2, 3, 6, and 8 are used on VITEK 2 Compact.
• Node: Indicates the SPN board function.
• Status: Indicates if the SPN board is present (detected) or disabled (not
detected).
• Seq Out: Indicates the communication packet sent from BCB to SPN
(development purposes).
• Seq In: Indicates the communication packet sent from SPN to BCB (development
purposes).

510779-1EN1
• Zero’s: Indicates the number of times the SPN board has reset since the last
boot. Under normal operating conditions, the SPN board should NOT reset. If the
SPN board does reset, the instrument emergency stops and card processing
discontinues.
• Pkts Out: Indicates the total communication packets sent from BCB to SPN since
power up (development purposes).
• Pkts In: Indicates the total communication packets sent from SPN to BCB since
power up (development purposes).
6.1.8.23 CLEAR_PM_STATS
Format: CLEAR_PM_STATS <component name or ALL>
Description: CLEAR_PM_STATS clears the Preventative Maintenance stats for the

given component or for ALL components. This command should be used when
preventative maintenance is performed on a corresponding component(s).
6.1.8.24 SET_PM_DATE
Format: SET_PM_DATE (year:YYYY) (month:MM) (day:DD)
Description: SET_PM_DATE sets the date of the last preventative maintenance

operation in non-volatile memory. This date can be reviewed from the Instrument
User Interface main menu by selecting Diagnostics > Last Maintenance Date.
Example: SET_PM_DATE 2004 01 01
6.1.8.25 GET_SYS_LANG
Format: GET_SYS_LANG
Description: GET_SYS_LANG prints the current system language.
6.1.8.26 SET_SYS_LANG
Format: SET_SYS_LANG <language>
Description: SET_SYS_LANG sets the instrument language. The system’s language

should always be set from the host PC. This command is only used for
demonstration purposes when the instrument is not connected to a host PC.
Example: SET_SYS_LANG 4
• 0 = ENGLISH
• 1 = SPANISH
• 2 = GERMAN
• 3 = ITALIAN
• 4 = FRENCH
• 5 = PORTUGUESE
• 6 = JAPANESE

510779-1EN1
6.1.8.27 SPN_SENSORS
Format: SPN_SENSORS
Description: SPN_SENSORS shows the current state of all SPN Sensors. This can be
used to diagnose Optical Switch Sensors. An alternative to this command is accessing
the User Interface hidden menu, as described in Drawing 532612, and selecting
Sensor States.
6.1.8.28 JUMPER
Format: JUMPER
Description: JUMPER displays the configuration for HDR8 on the Bay Controller
Board. The asterisk in the far right column indicates if a jumper is installed for that
specific location.
6.1.8.29 WELLMAPS
Format: WELLMAPS
Description: WELLMAPS lists all cards that the instrument knows how to process.
When the instrument leaves manufacturing, it has a limited knowledge of specific
card wellmaps. These include specialty wellmaps, engineering card wellmaps, and
identification card wellmaps. The operator is instructed to enter new AST cards at the
host PC (Maintain AST Card Definition) before trying to process them. Once entered
at the host PC, the new wellmap definition is sent to the instrument. That card type
remains in non-volatile memory and should not need to be entered again. The host
PC’s wellmap definitions update if the BCB is replaced, upon instrument power-up,
or if the instrument reboots.
If the operator tries to process a card that is not listed in WELLMAPS, it returns the
cassette back to the Load/Unload Station. An error occurs and the instrument
automatically rejects the cards (i.e. terminate). The cassette must be removed and
the cards must be discarded. The appropriate AST Card Definition should be entered
at the host PC before proceeding.

510779-1EN1
Example:
Figure 6-13: WELLMAPS Output Example
• Card Type – The numeric card type.

• Incu Time – The maximum incubator time the card reads before it ejects.
• Class – I for identification, S for susceptibility, O for neither.
• Group – N for gram-negative, P for gram-positive, O for neither.
• Flex – T if the card was entered through the software Flex Panel and F if not.
• Well Map Definition – Which optic reads the referenced well.
• 0 = well is not read
• 1 = well read by Transmittance 1
• 3 = well read by both Transmittance 1and 2
• 5 = well read by both Transmittance 1 and 3
• 6 = well read by both Transmittance 2 and 3
• 7 = well read by both Transmittance 1, 2 and 3
• Name – Indicates the 64-well card name.
6.1.9 Cabinet Commands
6.1.9.1 SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO
Format: SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO
Description: SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO reads the tachometer outputs of the intake

and exhaust cabinet fans. If the fan is running at 40% or greater, the message “fan
speed is within its range” displays. If the fan is running at a duty cycle of less
than 40%, the message “XXX fan speed below duty cycle threshold —
not tested” displays. To properly test the fans, use the SET_CAB_FAN_SPEED and
set the duty to 100 and time to 255. The fans turn on. Then type
show_cab_temp_info.

510779-1EN1
Example:

(fans running greater than or equal to 40%)

(fans running less than or equal to 40%)
6.1.9.2 SET_CAB_FAN_SPEED
Format: SET_CAB_FAN_SPEED (duty cycle<0—100>) (period<0—255>)
Description: SET_CAB_FAN_SPEED sets the duty cycle (%) and the run time (in ms)
of the cabinet fans. After the given time has expired, the firmware monitors/cycles
the fans.
Example: SET_CAB_FAN_SPEED 50 25
Alias Macro: FAN
6.1.9.3 GUI_ALERTS_DEFAULT
Format: GUI_ALERTS_DEFAULT
Description: GUI_ALERTS_DEFAULT immediately changes the User Interface contrast

as well as the Visual and Audible Alarm settings to a default configuration.

510779-1EN1
6.1.9.4 DEC_SCREEN_CONTRAST
Format: DEC_SCREEN_CONTRAST
Description: DEC_SCREEN_CONTRAST decrements the Screen Contrast. This lightens

each pixel of the LCD display. This can be performed from the User Interface Main
Menu by selecting Configuration > Display Options > LDC Screen Contrast.
6.1.9.5 INC_SCREEN_CONTRAST
Format: INC_SCREEN_CONTRAST
Description: INC_SCREEN_CONTRAST increments the Screen Contrast. This darkens

each pixel of the LCD display. This can be performed from the User Interface Main
Menu by selecting Configuration > Display Options > LCD Screen Contrast.
6.1.10 Vacuum/Filler Commands
6.1.10.1 FILLER_STATUS
Format: FILLER_STATUS
Description: FILLER_STATUS displays the current status of the Filling Module. This
includes ambient PSIA.
Example:
Figure 6-16: Filler Status Output Example
6.1.10.2 DUMP_FILLER
Format: DUMP_FILLER
Description: DUMP_FILLER displays information from the last vacuum cycle. The
numbers displayed are readings from the Pressure Transducer and are used in a
calculation based on the setting given when performing CAL_VAC. Therefore, all of
the readings are relative with the exception of the down and up slope. The
acceptable pump-down rate (down slope) is 0.30 to 0.60 PSIA/second and the
acceptable return rate (up slope) is 0.35 to 0.60 PSIA/second.

510779-1EN1
Example:
Figure 6-17: DUMP_FILLER Output Example
6.1.10.3 INIT_VAC (Alignment mode only)
Format: INIT_VAC
Description: INIT_VAC initializes the Vacuum. If the cycle is completed without errors,
the message Success displays. INIT_VAC includes checking ambient pressure using
the Vacuum Pressure Transducer and verifying that it is within range.
6.1.10.4 CYCLE_VAC (Alignment mode only)
Format: CYCLE_VAC
Description: CYCLE_VAC cycles the Vacuum System using SPN. If the cycle is
completed without errors, the message Success displays. Refer to Filler Status on
page 4-8 for the filler station pneumatic process.
6.1.10.5 FILLER_LEAK_TEST (Alignment mode only)
Format: FILLER_LEAK_TEST
Description: FILLER_LEAK_TEST tests the Filler for leaks. The firmware starts the
Vacuum Pump, pulls down to the calibrated PSIA value, holds for 30 seconds, and
then returns to ambient pressure. Confirm that no errors occur. Refer to Drawing
532600 for more information.
Example Output:
• Success: NO leak was detected during the fill cycle – Message

should appear at the terminal.
• Error: leak was detected during the fill cycle – There was a loss
greater than or equal to 0.06 PSIA during the hold time.
• Warning: Unexpected failure during the leak test – The vacuum
system failed for a reason described after the warning.

510779-1EN1
6.1.10.6 DIAG_FILLER (Alignment mode only)
Format: DIAG_FILLER (prop value 0—255) (pump 0—1) (valve 0—1)
Description: DIAG_FILLER allows for full control of vacuum system hardware for
diagnostics purposes. Always connect a pressure gauge in-line with the vacuum
system and monitor the pulldown. Do not let the Filler pull down past 0.89 PSIA.
Example Output: DIAG_FILLER 010
6.1.11 Transport Commands
6.1.11.1 INIT_TRANS (Alignment mode only)
Format: INIT_TRANS
Description: INIT_TRANS initializes the transport so that the Transport Block travels to
the back of the instrument and references the Transport Home Reflective Sensor.
6.1.11.2 TEST_TRANSPORT (Alignment mode only)
Format: TEST_TRANSPORT
Description: TEST_TRANSPORT performs a self-test of the Transport System. This test

requires a cassette to be installed at the Load/Unload Station, prior to executing the
TEST_TRANSPORT command. After the command is executed, the cassette is
detected by the Cassette Reflective Sensor. It then moves the cassette to the back of
the instrument, initializes to the Transport Home Reflective Sensor, and returns to the
Load/Unload Door. The Encoder Board is not being used for this command. To test
the Encoder Board, either use the SPN_SENSORS command or the
TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE 0 1 and TRANS_TO_SEALER 1 commands.
6.1.11.3 TRANS_TO_DOOR (Alignment mode only)
Format: TRANS_TO_DOOR <0=no stall detection> or <1=stall detection>
Description: TRANS_TO_DOOR moves the Transport Block to the Load/Unload

Station.
Example: TRANS_TO_DOOR 1
• TRANS_TO_DOOR 0 – Does not monitor the status of the Cassette Encoder

Board. It does not require a cassette to be loaded on the Transport Block.
• TRANS_TO DOOR 1 – Monitors the status of the Cassette Encoder Board. It
requires a cassette to be loaded on the Transport Block.

510779-1EN1
6.1.11.4 TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE (Alignment mode only)
Format: TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE (last card 0—9) (next card 1—10)
Description: TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE moves a cassette to the specified cassette card

slot position, such that it is lined up with the Bar Code Scanner. It requires the
cassette to be loaded on the Transport Block. It only moves the cassette in toward
the Home Reflective Sensor. You must specify the Last Card slot number and the Next
Card slot number.
Last Card is defined as the previous cassette card slot which was positioned to be
read by the Bar Code Scanner. Next Card is defined as the following card slot position
to be read by the bar code scanner.
• TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE moves the cassette to the bar code read location and
displays a “Success” message at the terminal.
• If the message “Error [0X31] Motor stalled” occurs, there is a problem
with the transport mechanical components, the motor, or the front or back
Transport Sensor on the Cassette Encoder Board.
Example: TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE 3 4 (cassette moves from card position 3 to card
position 4 of the Bar Code Scanner). TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE 0 3 (cassette moves
from Load Door to card position 3 of the Bar Code Scanner).
6.1.11.5 TRANS_TO_LOADER (Alignment mode only)
Format: TRANS_TO_LOADER (last card 0—9) (next card 1—10)
Description: TRANS_TO_LOADER moves a cassette to the specified cassette card slot

position, such that it is lined up with the Autoloader. It requires the cassette to be
loaded on the Transport Block. It only moves the cassette in toward the Home
Reflective Sensor. You must specify the Last Card slot number and the Next Card slot
number.
Last Card is defined as the previous cassette card slot that was positioned to be
loaded into the carousel by the autoloader. Next Card is defined as the following card
slot position to be loaded in the carousel.
For example: If you want the cassette to move such that cassette card slot 3 is lined
up with the autoloader, and the cassette had not previously been positioned, the
proper syntax of the command is “trans_to_loader 0 3”.
Example: TRANS_TO_LOADER 3 4 (cassette moves from card position 3 to card

position 4 in front of the autoloader). TRANS_TO_LOADER 0 3 (cassette moves from
load door to card position 2 in front of the autoloader).

510779-1EN1
6.1.11.6 TRANS_TO_SEALER (Alignment mode only)
Format: TRANS_TO_SEALER
Description: TRANS_TO_SEALER moves the cassette behind the Sealer. Then it slowly
moves the cassette past the Sealer toward the Load/Unload Door. This command
requires the cassette to be loaded on the transport block. It only moves the cassette
out toward the Load/Unload Door.
Example Output:
• Success — This command should move the cassette to the beginning of the
card sealer location, step slowly back to the load station, and display a
“Success” message at the terminal.
• Error [0X31] Motor stalled — There is most likely a problem with the
transport mechanical components, the Motor or the front Transport Sensor on
the Cassette Encoder Board.
• Error [0x32] Position was lost — There is most likely a problem with
the middle Transport Sensor on the Cassette Encoder Board.
6.1.11.7 TRANS_TO_CASS (Alignment mode only)
Format: TRANS_TO_CASS
Description: TRANS_TO_CASS moves the cassette such that the cassette bar code ID
lines up with the Bar Code Scanner. It requires the cassette to be loaded on the
Transport Block. It only moves the cassette in toward the Home Reflective Sensor.
6.1.11.8 DUMP_CO
Format: DUMP_CO (0—1 cassette object)
Description: When a cassette is processing through the transport, this command

displays the cassette contents and other cassette specific information. If DUMP_CO 0
does not display cassette contents, use the command DUMP_CO 1. The arguments 0
and 1 reference two different memory locations in NV Ram, and are not consistent.

510779-1EN1
Example:
Figure 6-18: DUMP_CO 0 Output Example
6.1.11.9 DUMP_VCD
Format: DUMP_VCD (1—9 Cassette ID)
Description: DUMP_VCD can be used when a cassette was previously scanned at the
host computer and is processing through the transport. It displays the cassette’s
contents and other cassette-specific information.
Example: DUMP_VCD 8
6.1.12 Bar Code Commands
6.1.12.1 TRIGGER_BARCODE
Format: TRIGGER_BARCODE (timeout in seconds)
Description: TRIGGER_BARCODE turns the Bar Code Scanner beam on and reads a
bar code for the number of seconds included in the argument.
• If the bar code read is successful, the value prints on the DML screen.
• If the bar code read fails, a “Failed” message displays.
Example: TRIGGER_BARCODE 5

510779-1EN1
6.1.13 Sealer Commands
6.1.13.1 INIT_SEALER (Alignment mode only)
Format: INIT_SEALER
Description: INIT_SEALER initializes the Sealer. If the cycle is completed without

errors, the message “Success” displays.
Alias Macro: seal_init
6.1.13.2 EXTEND_SEALER (Alignment mode only)
Format: EXTEND_SEALER
Description: EXTEND_SEALER moves the Sealer Motor until the Sealer Wire is
extended to its aligned position. The Sealer heating element is not turned on.
6.1.13.3 RETRACT_SEALER (Alignment mode only)
Format: RETRACT_SEALER
Description: RETRACT_SEALER retracts the Sealer Motor so the Sealer Wire is

contained inside the Sealer Housing. Use this command with the command
EXTEND_SEALER.
6.1.13.4 SEALER_ON (Alignment mode only)
Format: SEALER_ON
Description: SEALER_ON moves the Sealer Motor until the Sealer Wire is extended to
its aligned position and turns the Sealer heating element ON.
Alias Macro: seal_on
6.1.13.5 SEALER_OFF (Alignment mode only)
Format: SEALER_OFF
Description: SEALER_OFF retracts the Sealer Motor so the Sealer Wire is contained
inside the Sealer Housing and turns off the Sealer heating element. This command is
to be used with the command SEALER_ON.
Alias Macro: seal_off
6.1.13.6 TEST_SEALER (Alignment mode only)
Format: TEST_SEALER

510779-1EN1
Description: TEST_SEALER turns the sealer element on momentarily and displays the
current and voltage. Normal amperage should be between 7.6 amps and 9.6 amps.
Example:
Figure 6-19: TEST_SEALER Output Example
6.1.14 Autoloader Commands
6.1.14.1 INIT_AL (Alignment mode only)
Format: INIT_AL
Description: INIT_AL initializes the Autoloader Motor to the Autoloader Home Sensor.
If the cycle completes without errors, a message “Success” displays.
Alias Macro: al_init
6.1.14.2 CYCLE_AL (Alignment mode only)
Format: CYCLE_AL
Description: CYCLE_AL performs an Autoloader cycle.
Alias Macro: al_cycle

510779-1EN1
6.1.15 Incubator/Carousel Commands
6.1.15.1 INCUBATOR_STATUS
Format: INCUBATOR_STATUS
Description: INCUBATOR_STATUS displays the status of the incubator. This is real-

time information about the Incubator. The temperature accessed through the User
Interface does not show this value, but instead is a three-minute average.
Example:
Figure 6-20: INCUBATOR_STATUS
• Card — A calculated card temperature referencing the actual reading (there is no

thermistor for this value). The Incubator maintains card temperature at 35.5 °C
±1 °C.
• Actual — The real-time temperature of the Thermistor located inside the
incubator, behind the air table.
• Heater — The temperature reading from the Thermistor located next to the
Heater.
• State — The state of the Incubator. (1 is warming; 2 is stable) Anything other than
1 or 2 signifies the heater is not functioning properly.
• Heater Drive — The percentage of output for the Heater located inside the
Carousel Incubator.
Alias Macro: incu_stat
6.1.15.2 INIT_CARO (Alignment mode only)
Format: INIT_CARO
Description: INIT_CARO initializes the carousel by referencing the Incubator Home

Sensor and positioning the Carousel slot 0 with the Reader. If the cycle is completed
without errors, a “Success” message displays.
6.1.15.3 HOME_CARO (Alignment mode only)
Format: HOME_CARO
Description: HOME_CARO homes the Carousel without looking for the presence of
the Quadrousels.

510779-1EN1
6.1.15.4 SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO
Format: SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO
Description: SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO reads the current Incubator card temperature,

the tachometer outputs of the Incubator Fan, and the tachometer outputs of the
Heater Fan.
Example:
Figure 6-21: SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO Output Example
6.1.15.5 INIT_HEATER
Format: INIT_HEATER
Description: INIT_HEATER initializes the Incubator Heater.
6.1.15.6 DUMP_CM
Format: DUMP_CM <0 or 1>
Description: DUMP_CM displays the contents of the Carousel Map. DUMP_CM 0 only
shows the active Carousel slots. DUMP_CM 1 shows the status of all 60 Carousel
slots. If the instrument is configured to have a 30-card capacity, every other slot is
marked as reserved.
Example:
Description: DUMP_CM displays the active contents of the carousel map. Typing a 0
after the DUMP_CM only displays the active carousel slots. Typing a 1 after DUMP_CM
displays the status of all 60 carousel slots. If the instrument is configured to only read
30 cards, every other slot is marked a reserved.
Example:
Figure 6-22: DUMP_CM 0
• Available slots – Indicates how many slots are available in the Carousel.
• Slot — Indicates the slot position that the cards occupy in the Carousel. The slot
position with a —> indicates the current read position (such as position —>12
above).

510779-1EN1
• State — There are eight states:

• Empty — The slot is unoccupied and available for loading.
• Processing — This is the normal state where the slot is occupied and the
card is scheduled for readings.
• Completed — The slot is occupied and the card is ready for disposal. No
more readings are taken.
• Reading — The card is currently being read by the Transmittance Optics in
the Reader Head.
• Ejecting — The card is currently in the Reader Head moving towards the
Waste Bin.
• Loading — The slot is currently being loaded with a card.
• Terminated — The instrument is unsure of whether the slot is filled so it
remains unused. No reading, loading, or disposal occurs.
• Reserved — The slot is not used because the instrument is set up for 30
cards, instead of 60.
• Bar Code — Indicates the Bar Code Number for the card in that slot position.
• Elapsed Time — Indicates the amount of time the card in that slot position has
been processing.
• Read Count — Indicates the number of attempted reads already performed on
the card in that slot position. If the transmittance is non-functional, this counter
continues to increment.
• Last Read — Indicates how long it has been since the last attempted read of the
card in that slot position.
• Reason — Indicates the reason for the state condition.
Alias Macro: caramap

510779-1EN1
6.1.15.7 CARO_STATUS
Format: CARO_STATUS
Description: CARO_STATUS shows several status conditions of the carousel and

waste container as well as several carousel counter mechanisms. See below for
descriptions.
Example:
Figure 6-23: CARO_STATUS
• Carousel State: The state of the instrument. This includes: uninitialized, idle,
loading, processing, carousel cleaning, and paused.
• Current Upper Slot: The carousel slot located in front of the Reader.
• Current Lower Slot: The carousel slot located in front of the Autoloader.
• Read Mode: This is the Carousel’s Read Mode. Under normal operation, the
status displayed is either normal or first read. If the carousel was placed in fast
read via a DML command, the status displays fast mode. If the time between
card reads was altered via a DML command, then the status displays short cycle.
If it is both in fast read and short cycle, the status fast mode & short cycle
displays.
• Cards in Caro?: Indicates if there are any cards in the Carousel.
• SI Available Slots: The number of slots available for loading cards into the
Carousel (also displayed on the User Interface Status screen). This quantity
includes the number of cards being processed in the Carousel and Transport.
• CM Available Slots: The number of cards being processed in the Carousel.
• Capacity Key: The total capacity of the instrument based on if the Hardware Key
is installed (30 = no Hardware Key installed; 60 = Hardware Key installed).

510779-1EN1
• Instrument State: The status displayed on the instrument User Interface screen.
The status can be: OK, Warming, Error, or Maintenance.
• User Access Door: Indicates if the Front and/or Top User Access Door is open or
closed.
• Carousel Cover: Indicates if the Carousel/Incubator Cover is on or off.
• Waste Door: Indicates if the Waste Container Door is open or closed.
• Waste Container: Indicates if the Waste Container is present (installed) or
absent.
• Waste Clogged: Indicates if the Waste Container Chute is blocked.
• Waste Count: Indicates the number of cards in the Waste Container.
• Quad Count: Indicates how many Quadrousels are installed.
• Time Since Load: The time since the last card was loaded in the Carousel. Cards
need to be read within five minutes of loading.
• Time Since Fill: Indicates the time since the last cassette was filled. Cards need
to be read within 30 minutes of filling.
6.1.15.8 PAUSE_CARO
Format: PAUSE_CARO
Description: PAUSE_CARO stops the Carousel processing. Cards are not read.
Alias Macro: seq_pause
6.1.15.9 RESUME_CARO
Format: RESUME_CARO
Description: RESUME_CARO restarts the Carousel processing, if currently in a paused

condition. Cards begin to be read.
Alias Macro: seq_resume
6.1.15.10 CLEAR_CARO_SLOT
Format: CLEAR_CARO_SLOT <slot 0—59>
Description: CLEAR_CARO_SLOT changes the status of the card in a specified slot

location to Empty. If a card physically exists in the specified Carousel position, it is
necessary to use the CARO command to gain access to the card and then remove it
by hand.
Example: CLEAR_CARO_SLOT 44

510779-1EN1
6.1.15.11 CLEAR_CARO
Format: CLEAR_CARO
Description: CLEAR_CARO changes the status of ALL cards in the carousel to Empty.
If a card physically exists in any position of the Carousel, it is necessary to use the
CARO command to gain access to the card and remove it by hand. (Two other
options are: putting the instrument in Alignment mode and using the CARO_QUAD
command or performing a Carousel Cleaning (see VITEK 2 Compact Instrument User
Manual).
Alias Macro: zeroslots
6.1.15.12 LOAD
Format: LOAD <#cards> <card type>
Description: LOAD loads cards into the Carousel by means of the Reader Head. When
loading a card into the front of the Reader, the card must be orientated properly. The
interrupt holes of the card must be toward the bottom of the instrument and the
remaining transfer tube must be to the left of the Reader. The LOAD command also
requires some additional information. It needs to know how many cards are being
loaded and the card type. (See wellmaps for the card type). This command can be
used in conjunction with UNLOAD or UNLOAD_CARD.
Example: LOAD 3 9
6.1.15.13 UNLOAD_CARD
Format: UNLOAD_CARD <slot>
Description: UNLOAD_CARD changes the status of the card in a specified card slot to
Completed. With a status of Completed, the card is ejected the next time that card
slot is aligned with the Reader.
Example: UNLOAD_CARD 29
6.1.15.14 UNLOAD
Format: UNLOAD
Description: UNLOAD changes the status of all the cards in the carousel to
Completed. With a status of Completed, all cards eject the next time that the card
slot is aligned with the Reader.

510779-1EN1
6.1.15.15 CARO
Format: CARO <slot>
Description: CARO rotates the Carousel to the reader position, as indicated in the
command, referencing the Incubator Top Sensor. The Carousel slot positions are
numbered 0 to 59. This command can be used in conjunction with the
UNLOAD_CARD command.
Example: CARO 29
6.1.15.16 CT (Alignment mode only)
Format: CT <slot>
Description: CT rotates the Carousel to the Reader position, as indicated in the

command, referencing the Incubator Top Sensor (used in Alignment mode). The
carousel slot positions are numbered 0 to 59. This command can be used in
conjunction with the UNLOAD_CARD command.
Example: CT 30
6.1.15.17 CARO_BOTTOM
Format: CARO_BOTTOM <slot>
Description: CARO_BOTTOM rotates the Carousel to the Autoloader position, as

indicated in the command, referencing the Incubator Bottom Sensor. The Carousel
slot positions are numbered 0 to 59.
Example: CARO_BOTTOM 29
6.1.15.18 CB (Alignment mode only)
Format: CB <slot>
Description: CB rotates the Carousel to the Autoloader position, as indicated in the

command, referencing the Incubator Bottom Sensor (used in Alignment mode). The
Carousel slot positions are numbered 0 to 59.
Example: CB 13
6.1.15.19 CARO_QUAD
Format: CARO_QUAD <quad #>
Description: CARO_QUAD specifies the Quadrousel designator of 0, 1, 2, or 3 and

rotates the corresponding Quadrousel to the Incubator Access Cover.
Example: CARO_QUAD 1

510779-1EN1
6.1.15.20 CHECK_CARO_SLOP (Alignment mode only)
Format: CHECK_CARO_SLOP
Description: CHECK_CARO_SLOP checks and displays backlash in the Carousel

Assembly.
Alias Macro: caro_slop
6.1.15.21 INIT_EJECTOR (Alignment mode only)
Format: INIT_EJECTOR
Description: INIT_EJECTOR initializes the Ejector to its Ejector Home Sensor by cycling
the Ejector Motor. If the cycle is completed without errors, a message “Success”
displays.
Alias Macro: ejector_init
6.1.15.22 CYCLE_EJECTOR (Alignment mode only)
Format: CYCLE_EJECTOR
Description: CYCLE_EJECTOR performs an ejector cycle. If the cycle is completed

without errors, a message “Success” displays.
Alias Macro: ejector_cycle

510779-1EN1
6.1.16 Reader/Transmittance/CAM Commands
6.1.16.1 CAL_TX
Format: CAL_TX <module: 1—3>
Description: CAL_TX calibrates, checks, and returns a status of the Transmittance

Optics. It is necessary to enter the Optics number after this command. For example,
CAL_TX 1 for Transmittance Optics 1 (TX1) or CAL_TX 3 for Transmittance Optics 3
(TX3).
Example:
Figure 6-24: CAL_TX 1 Output Example
Alias Macro: calwave
6.1.16.2 CHECK_CAL_TX
Format: CHECK_CAL_TX <module: 1—3>
Description: CHECK_CAL_TX checks the calibration of the Transmittance Optics and

returns a status. It is necessary to enter the Optics number after this command. This
command is used only as a check. To confirm proper functionality of the
Transmittance Optics, use the CAL_TX command.
Example: CHECK_CAL_TX 3 (for Transmittance Optics 3 (TX3))
Alias Macro: valwave
6.1.16.3 SCAN_TX_SENSORS (Alignment mode only)
Format: SCAN_TX_SENSORS <0—1>
Description: SCAN_TX_SENSORS tests the Transmittance Optical Position Sensors.
• The command SCAN_TX_SENSORS 0 turns optical interrupts of all of the

installed Transmittance Optics ON.

510779-1EN1
• The command SCAN_TX_SENSORS 1 cycles optical interrupts of all of the

installed Transmittance Optics OFF (1) and ON (0).
Example:
Figure 6-25: SCAN_TX_SENSORS 0 Output Example
Figure 6-26: SCAN_TX_SENSORS 1 Output Example
6.1.16.4 READ_TX
Format: Read_TX <module: 1—3>
Description: READ_TX reads the Transmittance Optics. It is necessary to enter the

Optics number after the command. For example, READ_TX 1 reads the Transmittance
Optic 1 or READ_TX 3 reads the Transmittance Optic 3.
Example:
Figure 6-27: READ_TX 1 Output Example
Alias Macro: readwave
6.1.16.5 BURN_TX_SENSORS (Alignment mode only)
Format: BURN_TX_SENSORS <Module ID: 1—3> <# cycles><0—1: stopOnError>
Description: BURN_TX_SENSORS rapidly turns the Optical Interrupt Sensor of the

specified Transmittance Optics ON and OFF. This simulates Optical Interrupt Sensor
functionality when cards are read. The command can be set to stopOnError so if the

510779-1EN1
illumination of the Optical Interrupt Sensor is not detected, the burn_tx_sensors

routine stops, and an error is noted.
Example: BURN_TX_SENSORS 1 100 1 (Cycles the Optical Interrupt Sensors of

transmittance 1 100 times. It stops if an error is detected and issues a response).
Alias Macro: opt_int_burn
6.1.16.6 TEST_BELT
Format: TEST_BELT
Description: TEST_BELT tests the Read Head Belt by looking for noisy Transmittance
Optical Interrupt Position Sensors or excessive Belt frays.
6.1.16.7 INIT_CAM (Alignment mode only)
Format: INIT_CAM
Description: INIT_CAM initializes the Cam to its Ejector Home Sensor by cycling the
Cam Motor. If the cycle completes without errors, a message “Success” displays.
Alias Macro: cam_init
6.1.16.8 CYCLE_CAM (Alignment mode only)
Format: CYCLE_CAM
Description: CYCLE_CAM performs a Cam cycle. If the cycle completes without errors,
a message “Success” displays.
Alias Macro: cam_cycle
6.1.17 UPS Commands
6.1.17.1 UPS_STATUS
Format: UPS_STATUS
Description: UPS_STATUS displays the UPS Power and Battery status. (Note: If no
UPS is connected, the Power and Battery status displays as OK.)
Example:
Figure 6-28: UPS_STATUS Output Example

510779-1EN1
6.1.17.2 CHECK_UPS_BATTERY
Format: CHECK_UPS_BATTERY
Description: CHECK_UPS_BATTERY checks the state of the UPS Battery Signal. If the
UPS is installed, but the battery is low, the instrument user interface displays the
following icon:
6.1.17.3 CHECK_UPS_POWER
Format: CHECK_UPS_POWER
Description: CHECK_UPS_POWER checks the state of the UPS Power Signal. If the
UPS is installed, but there is no power to the UPS, the instrument User Interface
displays the following icon:
6.1.18 Host Communication
6.1.18.1 COM_STATUS
Format: COM_STATUS
Description: COM_STATUS displays the communications status of sent/received

commands. (Note: CTDB_STATUS displays the status of unsent commands.)
Example:
Figure 6-29: COM_STATUS Output Example
6.1.18.2 CTDB_STATUS
Format: CTDB_STATUS
Description: CTDB_STATUS displays Card Test DataBase status information about the
Logical Data Manager (LDM). This includes the status of Raw Data Retransmission
from the instrument to the Host (rexmit status), Critical Data Record Counters (see
table below), as well as the total Sent and Unsent Message status to the Host.
During normal operation, the CTDB tracks the number of unsent messages that are
stored in the database and have not been sent to the Host PC. This occurs when host
communication is down and cards are processing. When host communications is
restored, the CTDB reads the unsent data records and forwards them to the host PC.

510779-1EN1
The data records are sent in a first-in-first-out fashion, even while new data is
currently being collected. This process repeats until all of the unsent data transmits.
Table 6-2: Critical Data Description
Critical
Description
Data
CD MsgCardData: 1 data reading collected while processing a card.
CE MsgCardEjected: Indicates that a card was ejected from the system.
CI MsgCardInfo: Indicates that a card has been successfully loaded into the
Transport System.
CIE MsgCardInfoEnd: Indicates that the last MsgCardInfo Message has been
sent for a particular cassette.
CL MsgCardLoad: Indicates that a card has been successfully loaded into
the Carousel.
CLF MsgCardLoadFailed: Indicates that a card for which a MsgCardInfo
message was sent failed to be loaded into the Carousel.
CR MsgCardRejected: Indicates that a card was received by the instrument
but will not be processed. This is sent in place of a MsgCardInfo message
for that card.
E MsgFillerEvent: Conveys the success or failure of a fill cycle to the host.
TA MsgTransferAborted: Sent when the user aborts the processing of a
filled cassette.
TT MsgTransferTimeout: Sent when a filled cassette has not been loaded
within the allowed time window.
Example:
Figure 6-30: CTDB_STATUS Output Example

510779-1EN1
6.1.18.3 DUART_STATUS
Format: DUART_STATUS A
Description: DUART_STATUS A displays the status information for DUART A. This is

used to identify if there are communication frames or parity errors.
6.1.19 Flash Log Commands
6.1.19.1 LOGS
Format: LOGS
Description: LOGS displays the entire contents of the Flash Log contained in the Flash
Memory of the Bay Controller Board, starting from the earliest logged messages to
the most recent. When this command is executed, the earliest logged messages scroll
to fill the screen, then a prompt displays at the bottom of the screen giving the
following display type options:
Press any key to continue (ESC or 'Q' to quit, 'G' to never
pause)...
Alias Macro: flash_logs
6.1.19.2 LOGS_AND_HISTORY
Format: LOGS_AND_HISTORY
Description: LOGS_AND_HISTORY gives the same information as the LOGS

command as well as displaying the Command Line Interface (CLI) Flash History. CLI
Flash History is the history of the buttons accessed on the User Interface and the
commands typed in DML.
6.1.19.3 TAIL_LOG
Format: TAIL_LOG <tail count>
Description: TAIL_LOG lists the number of specified lines, starting from the most
recently logged messages contained in the Flash Memory of the Bay Controller Board.
Example: Tail_Log 5 lists the last five log lines entered into the Flash Memory of the
Bay Controller Board.

510779-1EN1
Figure 6-31: TAIL_LOG 5 Output Example
Alias Macro: flash_log_tail
6.1.19.4 BOOT_LOG
Format: BOOT_LOG
Description: BOOT_LOG lists all boot times in Flash Memory of the Bay Controller
Board and all logged messages since the last instrument boot.
6.1.19.5 GREP_LOG
Format: GREP_LOG <string pattern>
Description: GREP_LOG searches for specific text from the Flash Log and displays the
corresponding lines found. The text searched should follow the GREP_LOG command
and is case-sensitive.
Example: GREP_LOG fill (lists all logged messages containing the word “fill”)
Figure 6-32: GREP_LOG fill
Alias Macro: flash_log_grep
6.1.19.6 HISTORY
Format: HISTORY
Description: HISTORY displays the contents of the FLASH Command Line Interface
(CLI) history. CLI Flash History is the history of the buttons accessed on the User
Interface and the commands typed in DML.

510779-1EN1
6.1.19.7 TAIL_HISTORY
Format: TAIL_HISTORY <tail count>
Description: TAIL_HISTORY lists the number of specified lines from CLI history,
starting from the most recently logged messages contained in the Flash Memory of
the Bay Controller Board.
Example: TAIL_HISTORY 5 (lists the last five lines of the CLI).
6.1.19.8 GREP_HISTORY
Format: GREP_HISTORY <string pattern>
Description: GREP_HISTORY searches for specific text from the CLI history and
displays the corresponding lines found. The text being searched should follow the
GREP_HISTORY command and is case-sensitive.
Example: GREP_HISTORY dump (list all CLI text containing the word “dump”)
6.1.19.9 ERASE_LOG_HISTORY
Format: ERASE_LOG_HISTORY
Description: ERASE_LOG_HISTORY erases the entire contents of the Flash Log and
the flash Command Line Interface (CLI) History. CLI History is the history of the
buttons accessed on the User Interface and the commands typed in DML.
6.1.20 Diagnostic Commands
6.1.20.1 CLS
Format: CLS
Description: CLS clears the Diagnostic screen.
6.1.20.2 LOOP
Format: LOOP <#> {block}
Description: LOOP repeats the execution of other commands the given number of
times.
Example:
• LOOP 10 CYCLE_CAM (cycles the cam 10 times).

• LOOP 10 {SEALER_ON SEALER_OFF} (cycles the SEALER_ON and SEALER_OFF
commands 10 times).

510779-1EN1
6.1.20.3 LOOPK
Format: LOOPK {block}
Description: LOOPK repeats the execution of other commands until a key is pressed.
Example:
• LOOPK CYCLE_CAM (cycles the Cam until a key is pressed)
• LOOPK {SEALER_ON SEALER_OFF} (executes the SEALER_ON and SEALER_OFF
commands until a key is pressed)
6.1.20.4 PR
Format: PR <var> | <“text”>
Description: PR prints the value of a variable or specific text.
Example:
• PR $LINES_PER_SCREEN
• PR “test”
6.1.20.5 $LINES_PER_SCREEN
Format: $LINES_PER_SCREEN <=#>
Description: $LINES_PER_SCREEN sets the number of lines to be displayed on one

screen. This variable can adjust to the screen size used. If the output of the logs scroll
off the screen, change the variable to a smaller number.
6.1.21 Motor Commands
6.1.21.1 MN
Format: MN <motor name>
Description: MN addresses a Motor by name. See Table 6-3 for VITEK 2 Compact
Motor Names.
Table 6-3: VITEK 2 Compact Motor Names
CARD_TRANS Card Transport

CARD_SEALER Sealer Motor
CARD_AUTOLOADER Autoloader Motor
CAROUSEL Carousel Motor
CARD_CAM (Reader) Cam Motor
EJECTOR Card Ejector Motor

510779-1EN1
Example: MN CARD_TRANS
Note: MN H lists all of the instrument motor names.
Note: The Reader Motor is connected to the Head Controller Board and is not accessible
through a node. Instead the MOV & DISABLE commands are used.
6.1.21.2 CHECKHOME
Format: CHECKHOME
Description: CHECKHOME the current Motor (synchronous) and print any step loss.
See the MN command.
6.1.21.3 HOME
Format: HOME
Description: HOME the current Motor (synchronous). See the MN command.
6.1.21.4 IN
Format: IN <steps>
Description: IN moves the current Motor a given number of steps in (toward the
sensor). See the MN command.
Example: IN 10
6.1.21.5 OUT
Format: OUT <steps>
Description: OUT moves the current Motor out a given number of steps. See the MN
command.
Example: OUT 10
6.1.21.6 MOTOR_ON
Format: MOTOR_ON
Description: MOTOR_ON turns the current Motor on. See the MN command.
6.1.21.7 MOTOR_OFF
Format: MOTOR_OFF
Description: MOTOR_OFF turns the current Motor off. See the MN command.

510779-1EN1
6.1.21.8 MOV
Format: MOV <steps>
Description: MOV moves the reader Motor x steps, leaving the motor phases active. It
is specifically used to move the Reader Motor in a positive or negative direction and
requires a specified number of steps. The Motor phases are locked after the MOV
command is given. When finished with this command, the operator must type
DISABLE to disable the lock.
Example:
MOV 1500 (moves the reader motor clockwise toward the carousel)
MOV –1500 (moves the reader motor counterclockwise toward the waste bin)
6.1.21.9 DISABLE
Format: DISABLE
Description: DISABLE unlocks the reader motor phases after the MOV command has
been given.
6.1.22 Firmware Commands
6.1.22.1 REQUEST_FIRMWARE
Format: REQUEST_FIRMWARE Ø
Description: REQUEST_FIRMWARE Ø causes the instrument to request a BCB

firmware download from the host PC. Then a file is transferred from the Host PC to
the instrument Bay Controller Board Flash Memory.
Note: Argument 1 is for possible future development and Argument 2 is for development
purposes only.
6.1.23 Macro Commands
6.1.23.1 MAC
Format: MAC
Description: MAC lists all macros contained in instrument memory. A macro is a small
program that allows multiple commands to be combined into one.

510779-1EN1
6.1.23.2 ED
Format: ED <macro name>
Description: ED allows editing of an existing macro.
6.1.23.3 SETMAC
Format: SETMAC <macro name> <body>
Description: SETMAC creates a macro.
6.1.23.4 DELMAC
Format: DELMAC <macro name>
Description: DELMAC deletes a specified macro.
6.1.23.5 COPYMAC
Format: COPYMAC <macro name> <new copy’s name>
Description: COPYMAC copies a specified macro to a different name.
6.1.23.6 CLEAR_ALL_MACROS
Format: CLEAR_ALL_MACROS
Description: CLEAR_ALL_MACROS deletes all macros.
6.1.23.7 REFRESHMAC
Format: REFRESHMAC
Description: REFRESHMAC restores all default macros.
6.1.23.8 ALIGNMENT
Format: ALIGNMENT
Description: Refer to the VITEK 2 Compact Alignment Procedure (p/n 532600) for the
proper usage of the alignment commands.

510779-1EN1
6.1.23.9 ALIGN_ON
Format: ALIGN_ON
Description: ALIGN_ON configures the instrument for alignment, which includes

unlocking the doors. While in Alignment mode, the User Interface indicates or
displays that it is in Maintenance mode.
If the instrument is uninitialized or processing cards, the following warnings display

prior to entering Alignment mode:
• “WARNING: Cards are processing in the front end” (the front end
includes a cassette being processed in the Filler or Transport System)
• “WARNING: Cards are processing in the back end, use
‘PAUSE_CARO’ before opening any doors” (the back end includes cards
being processed in the Carousel and Reader).
• “Warning: The current instrument state is UNINITIALIZED”.
Note: If in burn-in, the current burn-in operations are suspended. These operations can be
resumed once the Alignment mode is exited.
6.1.23.10 ALIGN_OFF
Format: ALIGN_OFF
Description: ALIGN_OFF disables the instrument Alignment mode. If the instrument

is processing cards in the back end, prior to exiting alignment mode, a reminder
warning displays instructing you to RESUME_CARD. If PAUSE_CARO was executed,
use RESUME_CARO.
6.1.23.11 ALIGN_TRANS_CASSETTE
Format: ALIGN_TRANS_CASSETTE
Description: ALIGN_TRANS_CASSETTE perform an automatic alignment of the

cassette transport, with respect to the Card Presence Sensor and the Bar Code
Reader.
6.1.23.12 ALIGN_SEALER
Format: ALIGN_SEALER
Description: ALIGN_SEALER allows alignment of the Sealer Wire a specified distance

from a processing card.
6.1.23.13 CAL_SEALER
Format: CAL_SEALER
Description: CAL_SEALER performs an automatic calibration of the Sealer Assembly.

510779-1EN1
6.1.23.14 ALIGN_CARO_TOP
Format: ALIGN_CARO_TOP
Description: ALIGN_CARO_TOP allows alignment of the Carousel so that the

Carousel Slot is centered at the Reader mechanism during a Carousel Slot Read
movement.
6.1.23.15 ALIGN_CARO_BOTTOM
Format: ALIGN_CARO_BOTTOM
Description: ALIGN_CARO_BOTTOM allows alignment of the Carousel so the

Carousel Slot is centered at the Autoloader opening at the bottom of the Carousel
during a Carousel Slot Load movement.
6.1.23.16 ALIGN_CAM
Format: ALIGN_CAM
Description: ALIGN_CAM allows alignment of the Reader Cam.
6.1.23.17 SET_AL_HEIGHT
Format: SET_AL_HEIGHT
Description: SET_AL_HEIGHT assists in the alignment of the height of the Autoloader

Pusher.
6.1.23.18 ALIGN_AL
Format: ALIGN_AL
Description: ALIGN_AL allows alignment of the autoloader.
6.1.23.19 CALIBRATE_FILLER
Format: CALIBRATE_FILLER
Description: CALIBRATE_FILLER is a calibration routine used during instrument

alignment to establish a reference for the Filler’s Pressure Transducer.
6.1.23.20 INIT_PROP_VALVE
Format: INIT_PROP_VALVE
Description: INIT_PROP_VALVE puts the Filler Chamber in a vacuum state. As the

Proportional Valve opens, it identifies when the pressure in the chamber begins to
rise. This value is then recorded and referenced for future filler cycles.

510779-1EN1
6.1.23.21 SAVE_ALIGNMENTS
Format: SAVE_ALIGNMENTS
Description: SAVE_ALIGNMENTS saves the alignment information from the SPN

Boards to the Bay Controller Board. Failure to enter this command after an alignment
change results in the instrument not functioning.
6.1.23.22 RESTORE_ALIGNMENTS
Format: RESTORE_ALIGNMENTS
Description: RESTORE_ALIGNMENTS restores all saved alignment variables from the

Bay Controller Board to the SPN Boards.
6.1.23.23 SHOW_ALIGNMENTS
Format: SHOW_ALIGNMENTS
Description: SHOW_ALIGNMENTS displays all of the current alignments on both the

BCB and SPN. It also indicates if there is a difference.
Example:
Figure 6-33: SHOW_ALIGNMENTS Output Example
6.1.23.24 DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT
Format: DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT <Alignment Number 1—13 or ALL>
Description: DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT sets the target SPN alignment variable to a

default setting. The alignment number corresponds to the order shown in the
SHOW_ALIGNMENTS output (Figure 6-33).
Example: DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT 5 (defaults the Carousel Top Bias alignment SPN

setting)

510779-1EN1
6.1.24 BURN-IN Commands

BURN-IN exercises the instrument to identify and remove latent parts. It is not
intended to identify misaligned components. A hidden menu from the instrument
User Interface may also access these burn-in activities. This is achieved from the Main
Status screen by entering the password XXXX (where XXXX = USER INTERFACE
password for the corresponding login group) followed by the Status/Menu button. A
production menu displays. Refer to Drawing 532611 for the appropriate password
code.
Table 6-4 shows the individual components available for burn-in as well as their
corresponding groups. The Recommended Cycling Mode indicates the best method
for cycling a component.
Note: When entering Alignment mode, all of the statistics (cycle counts & errors) relating to
each component remain in non-volatile memory, therefore they are not lost.
Table 6-4: Components Available for Burn-In
Recommended
Group Component Notes
Cycling Mode
Vacuum Vacuum Individual Vacuum door must be closed
Component
Front End Sealer Individual
Component
Transport Individual
Component
Autoloader Individual
Component
Bar Code Individual Individual testing requires full cassette in
Scanner Component transport, beginning at Load/Unload Door.
Back End Carousel Back End Use QUICK_LOAD to load 30 cards in the
Group Carousel, prior to starting Back End group
cycling.
Cam Back End Use QUICK_LOAD to load 30 cards in the
cycling.
Ejector Back End Use QUICK_LOAD to load 30 cards in the
cycling.
Reader Head Individual Requires at least one filled card in the
and Optics Component Carousel. Individual testing is performed with
the Ejector and Cam cycling one card from the
Carousel to the Reader and then back again.
Door Door Locks Individual Front Access Door and Load Door must be
Locks Component closed.

510779-1EN1
6.1.24.1 ENABLE_BURN
Format: ENABLE_BURN
Description: ENABLE_BURN changes the instrument to Burn-In mode.
6.1.24.2 START_BURN
Format: START_BURN <component, group or ALL>
Description: START_BURN sets the state of the components or group to RUN.
6.1.24.3 SET_BURN_DEFAULTS
Format: SET_BURN_DEFAULTS
Description: SET_BURN_DEFAULTS sets the default counters and thresholds for each
component and group. It then clears all pending errors.
6.1.24.4 BURN_STATS
Format: BURN_STATS
Description: BURN_STATS displays the Burn-In stats for all of the components and
groups.
6.1.24.5 CHANGE_CYCLE_COUNTS
Format: CHANGE_CYCLE_COUNTS <new cycle count> <component>
Description: CHANGE_CYCLE_COUNTS sets the number of cycles Burn-In performs

on an individual component. See Table 6-4 for a list of components.
6.1.24.6 CHANGE_ERROR_THRESHOLD
Format: CHANGE_ERROR_THRESHOLD <Threshold> <component>
Description: CHANGE_ERROR_THRESHOLD sets the Error Threshold for the given

component.
6.1.24.7 CHANGE_GROUP_COUNTS
Format: CHANGE_GROUP_COUNTS <new cycle count> <group>
Description: CHANGE_GROUP_COUNTS set the number of cycles Burn-In performs

on a Group. See Table 6-4 for list of Groups.

510779-1EN1
6.1.24.8 CLEAR_ERROR
Format: CLEAR_ERROR <component>
Description: CLEAR_ERROR clears all pending Burn-In errors for the given component
and resets the cycles count. This can only be performed at the DML. This is not an
option at the User Interface hidden menu.
6.1.24.9 DISABLE_BURN
Format: DISABLE_BURN
Description: DISABLE_BURN changes the instrument to Normal mode. Any cards that
are processing in the Carousel are ejected.
6.1.24.10 DUMP_STATS
Format: DUMP_STATS
Description: See DUMP_STATS on page 6-19 in the System Commands section of this
chapter.
6.1.24.11 MONITOR_BURN
Format: MONITOR_BURN
Description: MONITOR_BURN displays stats of components and group while

refreshing the DML.
6.1.24.12 PAUSE_BURN
Format: PAUSE_BURN <component, group or ALL>
Description: PAUSE_BURN sets the state of a component or group to PAUSE.
6.1.24.13 QUICK_LOAD
Format: QUICK_LOAD
Description: QUICK_LOAD allows for quick loading of cards into Quad 1 and 2 for
Burn-In.

510779-1EN1
Troubleshooting General Troubleshooting
6.2 General Troubleshooting
The general troubleshooting information is to be used only by an authorized VITEK 2

Compact instrument service representative. All safety and hazard information must
be clearly understood and exercised anytime the instrument is serviced.
Table 6-5 references drawings to aid in troubleshooting a VITEK 2 Compact

instrument.
Table 6-6 provides general troubleshooting information to be used only by an

authorized VITEK 2 Compact instrument service representative.
Always refer to the latest revision of the drawings.
Table 6-5: Reference/Troubleshooting Drawings
Drawing
Document
Number
510772 VITEK 2 Compact Instrument User Manual (Chapter 6 – Diagnostics &

Troubleshooting including Error Code Customer Response Table)
531602 VITEK 2 Compact System Electronics Jumper and Test Point Specification
532611 VITEK 2 Compact Manufacturing Commands
Note: Before performing any commands listed below, reference the relevant command
found earlier in this chapter. Host PC/Workstation Log Files
Table 6-6: General Instrument Troubleshooting Information
Malfunction General Troubleshooting Actions
AC power to • Verify AC power switch is in the ON position.

instrument has • Verify AC power cord is properly connected to the power source.
failed. • Verify the proper voltages at the power source.
• Check AC power switch fuses in the Power Entry Module.
• Check the AC voltage selector of the Power Entry Module.
• Check fuses in AC Power Supply assembly.
• Check AC power cord for damage.
• Verify proper functioning of AC power switch on the instrument.
• Check output side of Power Entry Module for proper AC voltage. Replace filter if
voltage is incorrect.

510779-1EN1
General Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
No power output at • Check incoming AC power.

AC Power • Check installed fuses.
Distribution Board • Check Toroid Transformer windings.
• Replace transformer if windings are bad.
• Replace AC power board.
Power indicators are • Verify incoming AC power to instrument.

not lit on BCB board. • Verify proper functioning of power supply.
• Check fuses on the BCB.
• Replace BCB.
No indicator lights • Verify incoming power to board.

are lit on DC power • Verify proper functioning of incoming power supply.
distribution board. • Replace DC power supply board.
Transport failures • Run TEST_TRANSPORT to check the Cassette Reflective Sensor, the Transport
Home Reflective Sensor and the Transport Motor.
• Run TRANS_TO_BARCODE to check the front and back Transport Sensors on the
Cassette Encoder Board.
• Run TRANS_TO_SEALER to check the middle Transport Sensor on the Cassette
Encoder Board.
• To view the Sensor status, use the SPN_SENSORS command or access the User
Interface hidden menu, as described in Drawing 532612 and select Sensor
States.
• Ensure proper Sealer calibration/alignment, Refer to Drawing 532600.
Transmittance • With cards processing, refer to VITEK 2 Compact Instrument Users Manual –
Optical Interrupt Chapter 6, Cleaning the Optics (with Cards Processing – Power On).
failures • With no cards processing or Carousel paused (PAUSE_CARO), from the
instrument Diagnostics menu, enter into Alignment mode (ALIGN_ON). Run
SCAN_TX_SENSOR and/or BURN_TX_SENSORS to check the proper functioning
of Transmittance Optical Interrupts. Clean both Emitter and Detector Glass of
Transmittance Optics. Replace corresponding Transmittance Optics based on
information attained.
Transmittance • With cards processing, refer to VITEK 2 Compact Instrument Users Manual –
Calibration errors/ Chapter 6; Cleaning the Optics (with Cards Processing – Power On).
failures • With no cards processing or Carousel paused (PAUSE_CARO), run CAL_TX from
the instrument Diagnostics menu to test the Transmittance Optics (X= the
suspected optic 1, 2 or 3).
• Check flat ribbon cable connection.
• Replace corresponding Transmittance Optics based on information attained.
Reader jamming • Visually check the integrity of the Reader Head Roller Plate and Belt as well as
running the TEST_BELT command.
• Check for proper functioning of Reader Head Motor and Pulley.
• Check Reader Head to Carousel alignment by checking the top bias. (Refer to
Drawing 532600.)
• Check for proper functioning of Cam Assembly by using the commands
INIT_CAM & CYCLE_CAM.
• Check Cam alignment. (Refer to Drawing 532600.)
• Check the Carousel Quadrant for obstructions.
• Test for proper functioning of power supply 24 VDC (refer to Drawing 531602).

510779-1EN1
Troubleshooting General Troubleshooting
Carousel jamming • Confirm that the Quadrant is properly seated into Carousel Hub.
• Run HOME_CARO to check the Home Carousel Sensor (and proper Motor
operation).
• Check the Reader Head to Carousel alignment by checking the top bias and
bottom bias. (Refer to Drawing 532600.)
• Check for proper functioning of the Ejector by using the commands
INIT_EJECTOR and CYCLE_EJECTOR.
• Check for proper functioning of the Cam Assembly by using the commands
INIT_CAM & CYCLE_CAM.
• Check the Cam alignment. (Refer to Drawing 532600.)
• Check the integrity of Home, Top and Bottom Carousel Optical Sensors by using
the commands CARO_TOP (or CT) and CARO_BOTTOM (or CB).
• To view the Sensor status use the SPN_SENSORS command or access the User
Interface hidden menu, as described in Drawing 532612, and select Sensor
States.
• Verify the proper functioning of the power supply 24 VDC (refer to Drawing
531602).
Incubator • Run SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO to check Carousel temperatures and the status of

Temperature Failures both Incubator Fans.
and Errors • Check the integrity and connection of the Thermistor Assembly located inside the
lower Carousel Stack.
• Check the integrity and connection of the Thermistor Assembly located below
the Heater Assembly.
• Check the integrity of Heater Assembly located beneath the Carousel Fan
Assembly.
• Check the power supply voltages (refer to Drawing 531602).
• Check the Solid-State Relay for proper functioning.
Ambient • Run SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO to check the cabinet temperatures and the status
temperature out of of both Cabinet Fans.
range • Check the lab for excessively high ambient temperature.
• To check the Fan, use the command SET_CAB_FAN_SPEED.
• Ensure that the Intake Cabinet Fan Filter is clean.
• Check for obstructions on the outside of the instrument, and verify proper
clearances around the instrument.
• Note: Airflow of the Fan behind the Transport should be blowing into the
instrument. Airflow of the fan behind the Filler should be blowing out of
instrument.
Drive motor(s) will • Verify 12 V and 24 V Motor supply voltages on the DC Power Distribution Board
not operate. (refer to Drawing 531602).
• Verify the Optical Positioning Sensor integrity. To view the Sensor status use the
SPN_SENSORS command or access the User Interface hidden menu, as
described in Drawing 532612, and select Sensor States.
• Use the DML commands that correspond with the Motor to check for proper
functionality.

510779-1EN1
General Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Instrument not • Run CTDB_STATUS and determine if there are Unsent commands.
communicating • Verify that the RS232 cable between the instrument and the computer is
messages. connected.
• Reboot the Host PC.
• Verify the power supply voltages on the DC Power Distribution Board (refer to
Drawing 531602).
Filler/Vacuum • Run DUMP_FILLER to determine the status of the last Filler cycle.
System Alarms or • Run FILLER_STATUS to determine the overall status of the Filler.
Failures. • Run CYCLE_FILLER to perform a normal Filler cycle.
• Run FILLER_LEAK_TEST to test for Filler leaks.
• Ensure the Filler Door Seal and mating surface are clean.
• Ensure proper Filler calibration/alignment. (Refer to Drawing 532600.)
• Check the Solid-State Relay operation for the Vacuum Pump.
• Check voltage available to the Vacuum Pump.
• Check the Vacuum Pump operation, and replace Pump if necessary.
• Check piping components (tubing and fittings).
Sealer Alarms or • Run TEST_SEALER to test the heating functionality of the Sealer Assembly.
Failures. • Run EXTEND_SEALER and RETRACT_SEALER to test the mechanical functionality
of the Sealer Assembly.
• Ensure proper Sealer calibration/alignment. (Refer to Drawing 532600.)
• Check cutting wire integrity, and replace Assembly if necessary.
• Check Vac/Seal SPN board integrity, and replace if necessary.
UPS Failure. • Run UPS_STATUS to determine the status of the UPS.

• Check AC supply voltage to the UPS.
• Check and verify that communication cables and power cables are properly
installed.

510779-1EN1
Troubleshooting Windows XP Event Logs
6.3 Windows XP Event Logs
From the My Computer icon, right click and select Manage to open the Computer
Management application. From this application, you can choose to view the
Application, Security, or System event logs. These are Windows XP event logs
Figure 6-34: Computer Management Screen
• The Application Event Log contains informational messages, warnings, and

errors generated by applications running under Windows XP. You can review
these logs to determine how the various VITEK 2 Compact applications are
interacting with the operating system. The application developers decide what
events are recorded in this log.
• The Security Event Log records operating system events related to the Windows
XP operating system. You can use this log to help you diagnose problems with
account access. This log records login attempts, resource use, and security
configuration changes. The group policy settings determine what this log
monitors.
• The System Event Log records operating system events. You can use this log to
help when diagnosing problems with the operating system. Failures of drivers or
other system components will be recorded in this log. The Windows XP operating
system predetermines what is recorded in this log.

510779-1EN1
Windows XP Event Logs Troubleshooting
6.3.1 VITEK 2 Compact System Logs

The VITEK 2 Compact logs are located off of the root directory (D:\Program
Files\Vitek 2 Compact). These logs are useful for troubleshooting the application.
Primarily, the software developers will use these logs for third-level support. For
problems requiring third-level support, these logs should be captured for further
analysis. In limited cases, field personnel could examine these logs to help
troubleshoot a system.
There are two top-level directories that store product processing details.
Directory 1:
\instrument_messages
\device_COM5
\device_COM7
These folders contain a temporary list of messages that have been received from
the instrument but have not yet been processed by Workstation. The messages in
sub-directories are named by the COM port the message came in from.
What kind of data (and how it gets written) is stored here:
The serial port listening thread of the DeviceComm process writes each incoming
message to a unique file in the directory before sending the <ACK>
(acknowledgement) back to the instrument. The message processing thread will
read files from this directory, send the message to the CORE processing task and
if (and only if) it is successfully received by the CORE processing task is the
message file deleted from this directory.
The presence of these log files confirms that instrument messages are arriving
over the serial port to the workstation.
Directory 2:
\log
\card
\client
\server
These folders contain diagnostic output from the Workstation processing tasks.
The information in these directories are maintained by the EndOfDay processing
task on a nightly basis so that there are only four days of data in this directory
tree.
Under \log\card directory are sub-directories that are named with the bar code
of the disposable that was processed.

510779-1EN1
Troubleshooting Windows XP Event Logs
Within the \<barcode> subdirectory are log files written by the ID analysis
engine (named serveranalysis.exe) or AST analysis engine (named AST.exe)
(depending on the card type). There is a reading.log file and a results.log file
that contain the reading data and the raw analysis results data, respectively.
Under the \log\client directory are sub-directories that are named as the date
(dd-mmm-yy format) on which the client application(s) were run.
Within the \dd-mmm-yy subdirectory are sets of log files, one set of logging files
for each of the client applications. The base name of the log file set maps to the
application that generated the output. Here is a table that shows the mapping
between log file name and application:
Table 6-7: File Descriptions
Logfile Base Name Application Exe Name
Renaissance User Interface Main Client app V2C.exe
FirmwareUpdate Firmware Update FirmwareUpdate.exe
RexmitRequest Retransmit RenRexmitRequest.exe

Request
Backup_Restore_Isolate_Data_Client Backup/Restore BackupRestoreIsolateData.exe
Within each set there are up to 20 log files to store the diagnostic output from
the application. The individual log file names are made by taking the base name
and adding a 0.*.log to the end, where the * is a number. The newest activity
from the application is always written to the 0.0.log file. Once the log file exceeds
about 1MB in size the file is renamed to 0.1.log and the 0.0.log is then available
for the new log info. If there already a 0.1.log file, it is renamed to 0.2.log and so
and so on. If there is so much information that the 0.19.log is pushed, it is
deleted, thereby limiting the log information to 20 1MB log files.
Within the log file all of the log output records have a standard header. The
header contains the timestamp, JAVA memory information, the name of the
method that created the log record followed by the data of the log record. The
data can be anything that the developer chooses to write out at that time.
Under the \log\server directory are sub-directories that are named as the date
(dd-mmm-yy format) on which the server application(s) were run.
Within the \dd-mmm-yy subdirectory are sets of log files, one set of logging files
for each of the server applications. The base name of the log file set maps to the

510779-1EN1
Windows XP Event Logs Troubleshooting
application that generated the output. Here is a table that shows the mapping
between log file name and application:
Table 6-8: File Descriptions
Logfile Base Name Application Exe Name
CoreServer Main Business Process CoreServer.exe
Renaissance Device Communication Device Comm Process DeviceCommServer.exe
ShutdownMonitor ShutdownMonitor bmxJavaService.exe
EndOfDayProccessing End Of Day Proccessing EndOfDayProcessing.exe
For each set, the log file use the same 20 1MB log file naming scheme as the
client applications.

510779-1EN1
APPENDIX A: SPECIFICATIONS
A.1 Hardware Specifications
VITEK 2 Compact Instrument

Dimensions
Dimension VITEK 2 Compact
Height 60 cm (23.6 in.)
Width 72 cm (28.3 in.)
Depth 68 cm (26.8 in.)
Mass
VITEK 2 Compact
Mass Approximately 75 kg (165 lb)
CAUTION: The VITEK 2 Compact instrument is heavy. Use at least two

people to move it. When lifting the instrument, it is essential to use only
the handhold pockets on all four sides of the gray Base Pan to prevent
severe damage to the instrument and/or personal injury.
Environment
Indoor Usage
• Do not install in direct sunlight.
• Benchtop should be level within ±3 degrees.
• Instrument can be placed with its back against the wall, providing nothing is
obstructing the instrument’s fan air flow.
• Minimum of 11cm (4.3 in.) clearance on the left and right side.
• Minimum of 21 cm (8.3 in.) clearance above.
• Minimum installation altitude: -100 m sea-level
• Maximum installation altitude: 2000 m sea-level
• Ambient room temperature: 15 °C to 30 °C
• Shipment and storage temperature: -20 °C to 55 °C
• Relative humidity: 20% to 80% non-condensing
• Pollution degree 2 in accordance with IEC 664.
• Overvoltage Category II per IEC 664.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual A-1

510779-1EN1
Hardware Specifications Appendix A: Specifications
Electrical Characteristics
Electrical Characteristics VITEK 2 Compact
Input voltage 100/120/220/240 VAC at 50/60 Hz
Maximum input current 5 A at 120 VAC or 4 A at 240 VAC
Nominal input current 2.5 A at 120 VAC or 1.25 A at 240 VAC
Power 300 W nominal, 600 W peak
Heat 1025 BTU/HR (nominal)
Power cord Detachable 3-wire with ground, per IEC 320
Optical Characteristics
Transmittance Optics
Emission wavelengths: 660 nm, 568 nm, 428 nm LED
WARNING
There is a potential for non-laser optical energy emanation from
the optics which could result in personal injury or damage to
the instrument.
General Characteristics
Cassette
Capacity, cards: 10 cards per cassette
Vacuum (Filler)
Minimum level: 0.89 PSIA ±0.04 PSIA
Sealer
Mechanical: stub length 1.25 ±0.25 mm
Incubator
Temperature: 35.5 °C ±1 °C average
Capacity: 30 or 60 cards per Incubator (depending on configuration)
Note: It is important to consult your local regulations with regard to instrument disposal.
A-2 VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
APPENDIX B: DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURE
B.1 Decontaminating the VITEK 2 Compact Instrument
Note: All decontamination must be done with a 10% bleach solution, using good
laboratory practices.
1. Wipe down all exterior surfaces.

2. Referring to the VITEK 2 Compact User Manual (p/n 510772), perform
Cleaning the Carousel, Cleaning the Cassettes, Instrument Shutdown, Cleaning
the Optics (Power OFF), Cleaning the User Access Doors, Cleaning Instrument
Exterior, and Cleaning the Interior Instrument Components.
3. Remove any debris from inside the unit and dispose of it in a biohazard bag.
4. When cleaning the carousel, wipe down the base of the carousel, making sure
to clean all the way around.
5. Check the decontamination box on the MRA TAG (VTK-777).
B.2 Decontaminating Tools
All tools used while servicing the VITEK 2 Compact should be cleaned using a 10%
bleach solution as follows:
1. Moisten a foam or gauze sponge in the bleach solution and wipe all tool
surfaces.
2. Allow the bleach solution to react for a minimum of 10 minutes.
3. Wipe off the bleach with water using a moistened foam or gauze sponge.
4. Rinse all areas thoroughly.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual B-1

510779-1EN1
Decontaminating Tools Appendix B: Decontamination Procedure
B-2 VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
APPENDIX C: INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
Table C-1: Installation Checklist
Verify all outlets for proper grounding.
Place VITEK 2 Compact in its permanent location.
Place VITEK 2 Compact host PC, monitor, printer and any other optional peripherals in their
permanent location.
Properly connect all system cables including the Host Computer, Monitor, etc.
Refer to Figure 2-3 through Figure 2-6 for power and cabling diagrams.
Clean the instrument Vacuum Chamber door seal with a water dampened cloth or paper towel.
Clean the glass surfaces of the transmittance optics with a lint free lens paper or an alcohol wipe
with the excess alcohol squeezed out, followed by lint free lens paper.
Open the instrument front and top access doors. Install the carousel cover.
Install NIST Traceable Dial Thermometer, turn it on and then close all doors.
If an instrument upgrade from a 30 to a 60 capacity is required, perform the BCB Hardware Key
Installation procedure.
Configure the Host Computer switch setting to the appropriate power configuration (110 V or
220 V).
Configure the VITEK2 Compact instrument’s power entry module (PEM) to the appropriate
power configuration (100 V, 120 V, 220 V or 240 V) per Table 2-4. (See Figure 2-6)
If applicable, turn ON UPS and power conditioner. (Both of these are supplied only as options
with the VITEK 2 Compact system.)
Turn the monitor and printer power switches on.
Turn the Host Computer power switch on.
Configure the Host Computer date and time settings. (If non-English settings are required, see
Chapter 2 – Non-English Setup.)
Turn VITEK 2 Compact Instrument power switch on.
Install all four carousel quadrousels from the User Interface by selecting Main Menu >
Maintenance > Replace Carousel
Log in to host computer and access instrument diagnostics through HyperTerminal.
Log in to VITEK 2 Compact instrument diagnostics (DML).
Confirm the instrument status by using the HEALTH command. (Ensure no instrument errors or
warnings.)
Confirm the instrument firmware versions by using the VER command. (They should be the
latest configuration per Drawing VKCXXX.)
Record the instrument firmware versions of BCB, BOOT and SPN.

Application (BCB) _____ BOOT _____ SPN: Front Panel _____ Transport _____
Filler ____ Carousel _____
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual C-1

510779-1EN1
Appendix C: Installation Checklist
Table C-1: Installation Checklist
Enter the system number by using the SET_SYS_NUM command.
Ensure the instrument has been ON for at least one hour with all four quadrousels installed, the
incubator cover in place, and the thermometer installed.
When User Interface Status indicates OK, confirm the instrument incubator temperature is within
specification (35.5 ± 1° C) from the Main Menu by selecting Diagnostics > Temperature.
Record incubator temperature. ____________
From the User Interface select Maintenance > Temperature Check and perform a manual
incubator check.
Record the temperature displayed on the disk thermometer. ________
Confirm the instrument incubator temperature and the disk thermometer are within ± 1° C.
Put instrument in Alignment mode by using the command ALIGN_ON.
Perform a filler leak test by using the command FILLER_LEAK_TEST.
Verify vacuum level obtained is 0.89 ± 0.04 PSIA by connecting Absolute Pressure Gauge and
performing vacuum cycle. (CYCLE_FILLER)
Exit alignment mode by using the command ALIGN_OFF.
With the diagnostic window open, perform Chapter 2 - Simulated Processing Cycle and verify
proper alignment and operation of instrument.
Verify the doors are closed and reboot instrument by typing COLD. Confirm that the instrument
initializes properly and no errors or warnings occur.
Confirm remote diagnostic access. Refer to Chapter 6 – Accessing DML using Remote-Anything.
Once complete, remember to disable the host computer modem access.
Perform The Software Login and Alarm Message Review.
C-2 VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
APPENDIX D: INSTRUMENT ERROR CODE USER RESPONSE
TABLE
Using the Error Code User Response Table
The Error Code User Response Table is designed to provide, where possible, the
recovery procedure that is most likely to restore the instrument to normal operation.
If the described user response does not prevent recurrences of the error, call
bioMérieux for assistance.
1. Locate the detail code from the Error Message Queue screen described in
Chapter 6.
2. Find the Detail Code from the first column of the table. Detail codes are listed
numerically.
3. Read the corresponding Detail Code Description.
4. Read and follow the directions found in the User Response column of the
table and address accordingly.
5. If the error recurs, or the User Response advises a call to bioMérieux, inform
the service representative of the error number found in the lower right portion
of the message screen.
Cycling the Power of the Instrument
Several of the User Response procedures in the table instruct you to cycle the power
of the instrument. To do this:
1. Perform the Instrument Shutdown procedure in Chapter 5.

2. Wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Move the AC power switch to the ON position.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual D-1

510779-1EN1
Appendix D: Instrument Error Code User Response
Table D-1: VITEK 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table
Detail Detail Code

Primary Code User Response
Code Description
1 NA <unused> NA
2 1 Software Failure Instrument Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure
12 12 Software Warning Instrument This warning indicates that an internal software

Failure resource has fallen below the expected minimum
level. The instrument is still functioning normally.
Report to bioMérieux.
13 1 Software Failure Bar Code The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

Reader failure bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
14 3 Vacuum/Loader Bar Code The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

Failure Reader failure bioMérieux.
D-2 VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
15 8 Autoloader Jam Autoloader This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
motor failed to material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
home mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition the
cassette on the transport block before closing
door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
16 7 Transport Jam Transport motor This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
failed to home material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
during mechanical or electrical failure.
initialization 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
condition.
door.
during loading mechanical or electrical failure.
(after cassette 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
inspection) condition.
door.
18 9 Sealer Jam Sealer motor This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
mechanical or electrical failure.
condition.
door.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
19 3 Vacuum/Loader Sealer failure The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

Failure bioMérieux.



A field service visit is likely needed.
23 13 Load Door Open Load Door open Close door and cycle power.
while
attempting
initialization
24 13 Load Door Open Load Door open Close door and cycle power.
while
attempting to
initiate a
cassette load
25 3 Vacuum/Loader Load Door will Ensure that the Load Door is fully closed. Check the
Failure not lock latching mechanism for foreign materials.
26 3 Vacuum/Loader Load Door will Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.

Failure not unlock
27 NA <unused> NA
28 7 Transport Jam Cassette is not This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
hooked on material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
transport block mechanical or electrical failure.
pins during 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
initialization condition.
door.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
stalled while material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
counting cards mechanical or electrical failure.
condition.
door.
30 NA <unused> NA
reading card bar mechanical or electrical failure.
code 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
condition.
door.
moving cassette mechanical or electrical failure.
toward the Load 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
Door during bar condition.
code retry
door.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
moving cassette mechanical or electrical failure.
toward the Load 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
Door condition.
door.
sealing mechanical or electrical failure.
condition.
door.
loading cards mechanical or electrical failure.
into carousel 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
condition.
door.
unloading mechanical or electrical failure.
cassette 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
condition.
door.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
37 8 Autoloader Jam Autoloader This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
motor stalled material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
while loading mechanical or electrical failure.
cards into 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
carousel condition.
door.
38 3 Vacuum/Loader Vacuum SPN The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

Failure board failure bioMérieux.
39 4 Carousel/Reader Carousel SPN The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

40 3 Vacuum/Loader Transport SPN The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

41 NA <unused> NA
42 10 Host Bad command A communications error has occurred. Report to

Communication received bioMérieux.
Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure

Failure
57 15 Carousel Cover Carousel cover Ensure that the carousel cover is properly installed.
Missing is missing
during pre-
initialization
check
58 15 Carousel Cover Carousel cover Ensure that the carousel cover is properly installed.
Missing missing during
carousel
initialization
59 15 Carousel Cover Carousel cover This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
Missing detected material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
missing during mechanical or electrical failure.
move 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
condition.
2) Open user access doors.
door.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
60 14 User Access Door User access Close door and cycle power.
Open door is open
during
initialization
61 3 Vacuum/Loader User access Ensure that the user access door is fully closed.
Failure door will not Check the latching mechanism for foreign materials.
lock
62 3 Vacuum/Loader User access Cycle power and report to bioMérieux.

Failure door will not
unlock
63 18 Carousel Section Quad missing Referring to the carousel cleaning section of this
Missing during manual, ensure that all quads are properly installed.
initialization
64 6 Carousel Jam Carousel motor This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
condition.
door.
65 4 Carousel/Reader Incubator The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

Failure temperature bioMérieux.
failure A field service visit is likely required.
66 5 Reader Jam Ejector motor This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
condition.
door.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
67 5 Reader Jam Cam motor This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
condition.
door.
68 1 Software Failure Instrument Call bioMérieux. A power cycle may be required.

failure

failure

failure

failure
72 17 Card(s) All cards The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

Terminated unloaded due to bioMérieux.
incubator A field service visit is likely required.
temperature
fault, carousel
position lost or
unload via DML
73 17 Card(s) Cards unloaded Call bioMérieux.

Terminated because their
wellmap
changed
74 6 Carousel Jam Carousel motor This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
stalled material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
condition.
door.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
75 4 Carousel/Reader Carousel The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

Failure position lost (all bioMérieux.
cards unloaded) A field service visit is likely required.
All cards in the carousel are terminated and an

attempt is made to unload them into the waste
collection bin.
76 37 The card in slot Wellmap does This card is rejected (and terminated) due to the
(X) of cassette (X) not exist for a wellmap not being present.
was rejected card during
because this cassette Enter the needed wellmap before attempting to
instrument did not inspection process any further cards of this type.
have an appropriate
wellmap
77 17 Card(s) Fill-to-load Card(s) were terminated due to excessive time

Terminated timeout was elapsing between the filling operation and the
exceeded cassette loading being performed.
(card[s]
unloaded)
78 17 Card(s) Could not find A card edge or hole could not be found. The card in
Terminated the first edge of this carousel slot is terminated. When instrument
the card processing is idle, perform a carousel cleaning to
(terminated gain access to the card and make the slot available.
slot)
79 5 Reader Jam Could not find This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
the first edge of material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
the card mechanical or electrical failure.
(JAMMED) 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
condition.
door.
80 17 Card(s) Each optical A card edge or hole could not be found. The card in
Terminated position mark this carousel slot was terminated. When instrument
was not processing is idle, perform a carousel cleaning to
detected in the gain access to the card and make the slot available.
card while
moving out
(terminated
slot)

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
81 5 Reader Jam Each optical This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
position mark material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
was not mechanical or electrical failure.
detected in the 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
card while condition.
moving out 2) Open user access doors.
(JAMMED)
door.
82 19 Waste Bucket Full Could not Empty the waste bin.

or Waste Door Open unload card,
waste tray is full
83 19 Waste Bucket Full Could not Close waste door.

waste door is
open
84 19 Waste Bucket Full Could not Replace the waste bin and close waste door.
waste bin is not
present
85 19 Waste Bucket Full Could not Ensure that the waste bin is empty, present, and
or Waste Door Open unload card, that the waste door is closed. Check to be sure
waste chute is there are no cards remaining in the waste chute.
clogged
86 19 Waste Bucket Full Failed to eject Ensure that the waste bin is empty, present, and
or Waste Door Open card into waste that the waste door is closed. Check to be sure
bin (card was there are no cards remaining in the waste chute.
still in read
head)
87 5 Reader Jam Failed to place This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
the card back material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
into carousel mechanical or electrical failure.
while verifying 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
the head was condition.
clear (JAMMED) 2) Open user access doors.
door.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
88 5 Reader Jam Could not find This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
the first edge of material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
the card while mechanical or electrical failure.
reading 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
(JAMMED) condition.
door.
89 17 Card(s) Could not find A card edge or hole could not be found. The card in
Terminated the first edge of this carousel slot was terminated. When instrument
the card while processing is idle, perform a carousel cleaning to
reading gain access to the card and make the slot available.
(terminated
slot)
(Air) was not mechanical or electrical failure.
detected while 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
reading condition.
(JAMMED) 2) Open user access doors.
door.
Terminated position mark this carousel slot was terminated. When instrument
(Air) was not processing is idle, perform a carousel cleaning to
detected while gain access to the card and make the slot available.
reading
(terminated
slot)

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
(Plastic) was not mechanical or electrical failure.
detected while 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
reading condition.
door.
Terminated position mark this carousel slot is terminated. When instrument
(Plastic) was not processing is idle, perform a carousel cleaning to
detected while gain access to the card and make the slot available.
reading
(terminated
slot)
94 5 Reader Jam The last edge of 1) This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
the card was not material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
detected while mechanical or electrical failure. Respond to the
reading Intervention screen for the jam condition.
door.
95 17 Card(s) The last edge of A card edge or hole could not be found. The card in
Terminated the card was not this carousel slot was terminated. When instrument
detected while processing is idle, perform a carousel cleaning to
(terminated
slot)
96 5 Reader Jam An additional This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
row was material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
detected while mechanical or electrical failure.
reading 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
(JAMMED) condition.
door.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
97 17 Card(s) An additional A card edge or hole could not be found. The card in
Terminated row was this carousel slot was terminated. When instrument
detected while processing is idle, perform a carousel cleaning to
(terminated
slot)
98 5 Reader Jam Cam failure This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
while reading material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
(JAMMED) mechanical or electrical failure.
condition.
door.
(JAMMED) material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
condition.
door.
condition.
door.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
101 5 Reader Jam Carousel jam This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
after a Cam material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
failure mechanical or electrical failure.
(JAMMED) 1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the jam
condition.
door.
condition.
door.
103 4 Carousel/Reader Head Control The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

Failure Board failure bioMérieux.
104 43 Optics problem Transmittance Ensure that the TX optics modules are closed and
(may need cleaning) Optics module perform TX optics cleaning.
TX1 failed
calibration
TX2 failed
calibration
TX3 failed
calibration
TX1 position
sensor not
functional

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
TX2 position
sensor not
functional
TX3 position
sensor not
functional
110 21 Optics Almost Transmittance The instrument is still functioning normally,

Out of Calibration Optics module however perform optics cleaning.
TX1 nearing
calibration limits

TX2 nearing
calibration limits

TX3 nearing
calibration limits
TX1 is not
available to
process this card
TX2 is not
available to
process this card
TX3 is not
available to
process this card
TX1 reference
readings out of
range

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
TX2 reference
readings out of
range
TX3 reference
readings out of
range
119 11 Internal Data Component Report to bioMérieux.

Error Statistics failure


122 11 Internal Data Carousel Map The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
Error memory failure. bioMérieux.
Any tests running in the carousel are lost. Perform a

carousel cleaning to manually remove all cards from
the carousel.
Error memory failure bioMérieux.

the carousel.

the carousel.
125 11 Internal Data Cassette The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

Any tests running in either the filler or transport are

lost. Discard cards.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
126 12 Software Warning Memory failure Some card reading data may be lost due to a power
failure, software crash, or turning off the instrument
without first performing the shutdown process.
This may prevent results from being obtained for

one or more samples.
127 11 Internal Data Memory failure. The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
Error bioMérieux.
Error bioMérieux.
129 12 Software Warning Memory failure. Some card reading data may be lost due to loss of
communications with the host computer.
This may prevent results from being obtained for

one or more samples.
Error bioMérieux.
Error bioMérieux.
Error bioMérieux.
Error bioMérieux.
Error bioMérieux.
Error bioMérieux.
Error bioMérieux.
Error bioMérieux.
Error bioMérieux.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
139 11 Internal Data Memory failure. Report to bioMérieux.

Error
The instrument’s error code history is lost.

Error

Error
142 12 Software Warning Memory failure. Report to bioMérieux.
Error bioMérieux.
144 12 Software Warning Memory failure. Report to bioMérieux.
145 11 Internal Data WellMap Report to bioMérieux.

Error Manager can
not add more
WellMaps
146 22 Hardware Failure SPN board The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
failure bioMérieux.
147 NA <unused> NA
148 NA <unused> NA
149 NA <unused> NA
150 NA <unused> NA
151 NA <unused> NA
152 20 Doors opened Emergency Stop A door was opened while locked. As this could
while processing – – door open present a hazard to the user, all instrument
Emergency Stop while locks operations are halted.
occurred engaged
Ensure doors are closed and then cycle power to
the instrument.
If a cassette was processing in the transport, it tries

to recover when power is restored. (Do not remove
cassette unless prompted.)
153 22 Hardware Failure RTC and CPU The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
Xtal cross-check bioMérieux.
failure – A field service visit is likely required.
frequency
mismatch

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
154 3 Vacuum/Loader Cabinet Ensure that the instrument’s ambient temperature

Failure Temperature specifications are not exceeded.
High
Ensure that the cabinet ventilation fans are not
blocked and that all air filters are clean.
155 22 Hardware Failure Power Supply Ensure that the instrument’s ambient temperature
Temperature specifications are not exceeded.
High
Ensure that the cabinet ventilation fans are not
156 24 UPS power UPS indicates a A power failure has occurred and the instrument is
failure or battery bad power failure operating on the UPS battery.
has occurred
157 24 UPS power UPS Battery has The battery in the UPS may be defective.
failure or battery bad failed
Call bioMérieux.
158 22 Hardware Failure Cabinet intake The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
fan is rotating bioMérieux.
too slowly. A field service visit is likely required.
159 22 Hardware Failure Cabinet exhaust The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
160 23 Incubator failure Incubator heater The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
161 23 Incubator failure Incubator The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

circulation fan is bioMérieux.
rotating too A field service visit is likely required.
slowly.
162 23 Incubator failure Incubator Ensure that the instrument’s ambient temperature
temperature is specifications are not exceeded.
out of
specification Ensure that the cabinet ventilation fans are not
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
163 25 Filler failure Fill cycle failure The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux. A field service visit is likely required.
bioMérieux. A field service visit is likely required.
165 25 Filler failure Insufficient Enter cassette ID as prompted and discard cards.
vacuum level
achieved during Ensure that the door seal on the vacuum filler is
fill cycle clean, then perform filler test.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
166 25 Filler failure Incorrect up Enter cassette ID as prompted and discard cards.
slope during fill
cycle Ensure that the door seal on the vacuum filler is
clean, then perform filler test.
167 25 Filler failure Incorrect down Enter cassette ID as prompted and discard cards.
slope during fill
cycle Ensure that the door seal on the vacuum filler is
clean, then perform filler test.
168 25 Filler failure Fill cycle failure Enter cassette ID as prompted and discard cards.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

bioMérieux.
bioMérieux.
170 26 The card in slot The card was Discard the identified card(s). They were not
(X) of cassette (X) removed from accepted for processing.
will not be loaded the cassette
because it was not during a power
detected after a failure and
power failure replaced with
another card.
(X) of cassette (X) removed from accepted for processing.
will not be loaded the cassette
because it was not during a power
detected after a failure.
power failure
172 27 The card in slot The card was no Discard the identified card(s).They were not
(X) of cassette (X) longer readable accepted for processing.
will not be loaded after a power
because it could not failure.
be scanned after a
power failure
(X) of cassette (X) not loaded in accepted for processing.
will not be loaded the time
because it exceeded allowed (power
the loading timeout failure).
(X) of cassette (X) not loaded in accepted for processing.
because it exceeded allowed (power

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
(X) of cassette (X) being sealed accepted for processing.
will not be loaded when a
because it mechanical
encountered a error occurred.
mechanical error (Power Failure)
while sealing
176 NA <unused> NA
because it transport
encountered a mechanical
mechanical error error occurred.
while sealing (Alarm)
because it transport
encountered a mechanical
mechanical error error occurred.
while sealing (jam)
(X) of cassette (X) rejected accepted for processing.
was rejected because the
because it has card is expired.
expired
was rejected because of
because of insufficient
insufficient carousel carousel
capacity capacity.
was rejected because it was
because it was introduced in
introduced after the place of another
cards in the cassette card during a
were sealed power failure.
was rejected because it was
because it was introduced
introduced after the where no
cards in the cassette previous card
were sealed was during a
power failure.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
because this instrument does
instrument is not not have the
configured with the required optics.
required optics
(X) of cassette (X) defined and was accepted for processing.
was rejected not detected
because a virtual during
card was defined for processing.
that slot and not
detected
was rejected because it
because the mismatched the
scanned card did not definition.
match the virtual
card defined for that
slot
was rejected because it
because the mismatched the
scanned card did not definition during
match the virtual a timeout.
card when the
cassette timed out
187 37 The card in slot The card was Discard the card(s).
(X) of cassette (X) rejected
was rejected because the The “Maintain AST definitions” data entry for this
because this instrument did card type should be performed before attempting
instrument did not not have a to process additional cards of this type.
have an appropriate proper wellmap.
wellmap
was not loaded due because the
to a biological cassette load
timeout timer timed out.
timeout timer timed out
over a power
failure.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
was not loaded because the
because it timed out intervention
and was unreadable timer timed out
and the Bar
Code was
unreadable.
(X) of cassette (X) rejected (user accepted for processing.
was rejected skipped).
192 38 Cassette (X) was The cassette Discard the card(s) in the specified cassette. They
aborted by the user transfer was were not accepted for processing.
aborted by the
user.
193 39 Cassette (X) was A filling failure Discard the card(s) in the specified cassette. They
terminated due to a occurred were not accepted for processing.
fill failure (cassette
cancelled)
194- 44 Component Stats NA Instrument errors of this type should not occur in
218 normal processing mode. (Factory only.)
219 12 Software Warning SPN Variable Call bioMérieux.

Error
220 1 Software Failure SPN Variable Call bioMérieux.

Error

Error

Error

Error

Error
225 12 Software Warning A DML ‘LOGIN’ Call bioMérieux.

macro is present
226 1 Software Failure Memory failure Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
227 46 Cassette (X) was The Cassette Discard the card(s) in the specified cassette. They
not transferred to was not were not accepted for processing.
the loader within the transferred in
appropriate time. the allotted
time. (10
Minutes)

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
228 47 The scanned The scanned This error indicates that after a power failure or
cassette ID did not cassette ID did clearing of a jam, the cassette ID that was scanned
match the stored not match the does not match the original ID that was scanned or
cassette ID while scanned ID user-entered.
verifying an
accepted cassette. If the bar code of the cards match the originally
scanned bar codes, this error is informational only. If
they did not match, other errors relating to those
cards rejections are logged. This error code provides
information only.
229 48 Cassette (X) was A cassette was Discard the card(s) in the specified cassette. They
filling when power filling when a were not accepted for processing.
failed and has been power failure
discarded. occurred.
failure
231 28 The card in slot The card was Discard the card(s) in the specified cassette. They
(X) of cassette (X) not loaded in were not accepted for processing.
because it exceeded allowed. (power
232 1 Software Failure Reboots halted The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
due to repeating bioMérieux.
error A field service visit is likely required.
235 22 Hardware Failure Emergency Stop The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
– Front Panel bioMérieux.
SPN board A field service visit is likely required.
failure
236 - 44 Component Stats NA Instrument errors of this type should not occur in
242 49 A fill was stopped A vacuum was Ensure that the door seal on the vacuum filler is
because no vacuum not achieved clean and then re-try the filling operation.
was achieved (Clean during a fill.
the Seal).
243 50 Detected a loose Position sensor Call bioMérieux.

read head belt or TX1 tripped
noisy optical during reader
position sensor head belt test,
off condition

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description

off condition

off condition

on condition

on condition

on condition
249 4 Carousel/Reader SPN board The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

Failure failure bioMérieux.
250 3 Vacuum/Loader SPN board The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

251 3 Vacuum/Loader SPN board The instrument is in a fault condition. Call

253 40 The card in slot The card was The cards were not loaded, probably due to a
(X) of cassette (X) rejected power failure or jam recovery. Discard the card(s) in
was not loaded due because the first the specified cassette. They were not accepted for
to a biological read timer processing.
timeout timed out.
254 40 The card in slot The card was The cards were not loaded, probably due to a
(X) of cassette (X) rejected power failure or jam recovery. Discard the card(s) in
was not loaded due because the first the specified cassette. They were not accepted for
to a biological read timer processing.
timeout timed out.

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
255 41 The card in slot The card was Discard the card(s) specified. They were not
and the bar
code was
unreadable.
failure
257 1 Software Failure Instrument has Report to bioMérieux.

reset
258 51 The card in slot The Cassette Discard the card(s) specified. They were not
(X) of cassette (X) was removed accepted for processing.
was terminated over a power
because the cassette failure while it
was not present was in process.
after a power failure.
failure
260- 45 BurnIn NA Instrument errors of this type should not occur in

failure
was not loaded due because the first
to a biological read timer
timeout timed out
(power failure).
timeout timer timed out
(power failure).
and the Bar
Code was
unreadable
(power failure).

510779-1EN1
Detail Detail Code

Code Description
was rejected because it has a
duplicate in the
cassette or
carousel.
cassette is out of
alignment.


270- 44 Component Stats NA Instrument errors of this type should not occur in
272 10 Host No response Workstation may be turned off or may not be

Communication from the connected. Check the power on the PC and be sure
Failure Workstation PC the data cable is secure.
for 1 hour.

510779-1EN1

510779-1EN1
GLOSSARY
Bar Code An alphanumeric interface identifier label affixed to each VITEK 2

test card and cassette. The card bar code contains the card’s test
type, lot number, and expiration date, which is entered either by
bar code wanding, or when read by the internal instrument Bar
Code Reader. The cassette bar code identifies the cassette to the
instrument.
Bar Code Reader This station reads the bar code label on each cassette and test card
(Instrument) after the test cards are loaded into the Cassette Load/Unload
Station. It then transfers all of the test card bar code data to the
VITEK 2 Compact Workstation computer.
Carousel The rotating incubator section, which holds up to 30 or 60 test

cards per incubator, depending on the instrument model.
Cassette The cassette is a carrier that holds up to 10 test cards and their
inoculum test tubes. It is used for sample preparation and
processing inside the instrument. The cassette is equipped with a
bar code that identifies the cassette to the instrument.
Filler Station The Filler Station inoculates all of the cards in a cassette with the
suspension contained in their corresponding test tubes. It uses a
Vacuum Chamber and air pump.
Incubator The incubator contains a heater and a circulating fan used to

incubate the cards at optimal environmental conditions during
testing. The temperature is monitored and controlled through the
use of two remote precision thermistors monitored by a
microprocessor holding the card at an average temperature of
35.5 °C.
LED Light emitting diode, a light emitting device used in optical displays.
See also, transmittance optics.
Sealer Station This station seals each test card by cutting and sealing its
associated inoculum transfer tube using a hot wire.
Test Card A plastic card with 64 growth wells for biological testing in VITEK 2
systems. Each well contains an air-dried suspension of a
biochemical or antibiotic.
Transmittance Optics A combination of light-emitting diodes (emitters) and photodiodes

used to read the growth results in the card wells.
User Access Doors VITEK 2 Compact has two doors to enable the operator to access
the internal systems and stations to perform maintenance and
cleaning procedures: Top User Access Door and Front User Access
Door.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual Glossary-1

510779-1EN1
Glossary
User Interface (UI) The portion of the system in which the user and the system’s
software interact. The system has two user interfaces:
• Workstation computer, consisting of a monitor, keyboard, and
mouse.
• VITEK 2 Compact instrument, consisting of a keypad and screen.
Waste Collection This station includes a waste collection bin which holds up to 60
Station test cards. Ejected test cards are collected in the bin for removal
from the instrument and disposal.
Workstation/Host The workstation computer is the primary processor used in

Computer calculating test results. The workstation can also be used as a
means to interface the instrument with a central laboratory
information system (LIS) or hospital computer system.
The workstation computer provides the user with the graphical user
interface used with the mouse pointing device and workstation
monitor, and a text interface for the keyboard. It is also used to
configure some options on the VITEK 2 Compact system (e.g. time
of AST card ejection, manually delete/eject cards, etc.).
Glossary-2 VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
INDEX
A D
Accessing DML 6-6 Decontaminating Tools B-1
HyperTerminal 6-6 Decontamination Procedure B-1
physical connection 6-7
Default Passwords 2-13
Administrator Password 2-13
Definition
Alarm Message Review 2-31 Bar Code Glossary-1
Appendix A A-1 carousel Glossary-1
Appendix C D-1 cassette Glossary-1
filler station Glossary-1
Autoloader Station 3-10
incubator Glossary-1
instrument bar code reader Glossary-1
B LED Glossary-1
Bar Code sealer station Glossary-1
definition Glossary-1 test card Glossary-1
transmittance optics Glossary-1
Bar Code Reader 3-8
user access doors Glossary-1
BCB Hardware Key Installation 2-11 user interface Glossary-2
waster collection station Glossary-2
C workstation computer Glossary-2
Cabling Diagram 2-9 Diagnostic, Instrument 6-6
CARD Instrument Error Code Diagnostics Connection 2-20
user response table D-1 Dimensions, Instrument A-1
Card Reading Test 2-30 DML
Card Sealer Assembly 3-9 HyperTerminal 6-6
Carousel physical connection 6-7
definition Glossary-1 DML, Accessing 6-6
Cassette DML, Using 6-6
definition Glossary-1 Documents, Reference 2-4
Cassette Scan Test 2-29
Cassette Setup 2-28 E
Characteristics Electrical Characteristics A-2
electrical A-2 Environment A-1
general A-2
Equipment Usage A-1
optical A-2
Checklist, Installation C-1
F
Configuration
Instrument 2-6 Fill Cycle Test 2-28
Configuration, Host Computer 2-6 Filler
complete 4-9
Connecting Your Instrument 2-5
filling 4-8
Conventions idle 4-8
typographic and usage 1-4 not ready 4-9
Filler Station 3-5
definition Glossary-1
Finding Topics
in this manual 1-3
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual Index-1

510779-1EN1
Index
G Instrument Cabling, Diagram 2-9

Instrument Configuration 2-6
General
characteristics A-2 Instrument Connections 2-5
status 4-11 Instrument Diagnostic 6-6
Instrument Information 2-25
H Instrument Installation 2-3
Handhold Locations 2-3 Instrument Placement 2-5
Hardware Instrument Setup 2-27
specifications A-1
Hardware Key, BCB 2-11 K
Host Computer Configuration 2-6 Keypad 3-3
HyperTerminal
Accessing DML 6-6 L
I LED
Icon Key 2-26 Load/Unload Station 3-6
Incubator Loader
definition Glossary-1 cassette number 4-11
Incubator Heater Assembly 3-11 empty status 4-9
Indicator reading bar code 4-10
information 4-11 remove 4-10
warning 4-11 sealing 4-10
status 4-9
Indoor Usage A-1
virtual cassette icon 4-11
Information Indicator 4-11
Installation M
BCB Hardware Key 2-11
Manual
Installation Checklist C-1
finding topics 1-3
Instrument standard symbols 1-5
bar code reader
Mass, Instrument A-1
dimensions A-1 Menu system 4-5
mass A-1
restarting D-1 O
status 4-6
Operation 3-2
Optical
characteristics A-2
Index-2 VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1
Index
Overview, System 3-1 Test Cards

P Tools, Decontaminating B-1
Passwords, Default 2-13 Topics
finding in this manual 1-3
Power Connection, Diagram 2-7
Transmittance Optics
Power Entry Module, Diagram 2-6
Power Up Instrument 2-12
Troubleshooting 6-1
Processing Cycle 2-27
Turning On Instrument 2-12
R Typographic Conventions 1-4
Reader System 3-11 U

Reader/Incubator Station 3-10
Unpacking Procedure 2-2
Reference Documents 2-4
Unpacking System 2-2
Response Table D-1
Usage
indoor A-1
S
Usage Conventions 1-4
Screen
Usage, Indoor A-1
instrument status 4-6
User Access Door
Sealer Station
User Interface 3-3
Sealing and Cassette Removal Test 2-29
Setup System 2-1
User Response Table
Simulated Processing Cycle 2-27 CARD instrument error code D-1
Software Login Review 2-31 Using DML 6-6
Specifications A-1
hardware A-1 V
Standard Symbols Verifying Instrument Works 2-20
use in manual 1-5
VITEK 2 Compact Instrument Specifications A-1
Status
instrument 4-6
W
screen 4-6
Symbols Warning
standard indicator 4-11
use in manual 1-5 Waste Collection Station 3-12
System Overview 3-1 definition Glossary-2
System Placement 2-5 Waste Container Unloading Test 2-30
System Setup 2-1 Workstation
T
Test
Card Reading 2-30
Cassette Scan 2-29
Fill Cycle 2-28
Sealing and Cassette Removal 2-29
Waste Container Unloading 2-30
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual Index-3

510779-1EN1
Index
Index-4 VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

510779-1EN1

VITEK 2 Compact Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VITEK 2 Compact Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

510779-1EN1

VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

Distribution in over 130 countries

VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

Furthermore, this manual may be modified by bioMérieux without notice and

bioMérieux and VITEK are registered trademarks of bioMérieux, Inc.

Loctite is a registered trademark of the Henkel Corporation.

Vibratite is a registered trademark of ND Industries.

Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.

Lucent is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies Inc.

© 2004 bioMérieux, Inc. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a

Other Patents Pending.

D414,272; D437,797; 5,609,828; 5,746,980; 5,804,437; 5,869,005; 5,932,177;

VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

bioMérieux, Inc., (“Seller”) warrants the VITEK 2 Compact instrument (the

VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL .......................................................................................................... 1-1

2 SYSTEM SETUP ............................................................................................................................... 2-1

3 SYSTEM OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................ 3-1

VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual i

3.2.5 Transport System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS .................................................................................................................. 4-1

5 COMPONENT REPLACEMENT .......................................................................................................... 5-1

ii VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

5.2.2 Left Side Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual iii

5.13.1 Heater Incubator Fan Replacement (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

6 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................................................... 6-1

iv VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

6.1.10 Vacuum/Filler Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

B DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURE ...................................................................................................B-1

C INSTALLATION CHECKLIST ..............................................................................................................C-1

D INSTRUMENT ERROR CODE USER RESPONSE TABLE .................................................................... D-1

VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual v

vi VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

Figure 2-1: Proper Handhold Locations .....................................................................................................2-3

VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual vii

Figure 3-15: Transmittance Optics Cross Section ................................................................................... 3-12

viii VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

Figure 5-4: Power Entry Module ................................................................................................................ 5-11

VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual ix

Figure 6-3: Words Example One................................................................................................................ 6-12

x VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

Table 2-1: Reference Documents ..................................................................................................................2-4

VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual xi

xii VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

About This Chapter

1.1 Purpose of the This Manual • 1-2

VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual 1-1

1.1 Purpose of the This Manual

This Service Manual contains information on the operation, installation, maintenance,

1.2 Intended Audience

1.3 Organization of the Manual

The following is a brief outline of this manual:

1-2 VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual

Following these chapters are appendices listing specifications, procedures for

After completing this service manual, you should be able to:

1.4 Chapter Organization

1.5 Finding Topics

VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual 1-3

1.6 Typographic and Usage Conventions

1.6.1 Name and Titles